Related Applications

This application claims the benefit of priority to United States Provisional Patent Applications serial numbers 60/580,616, filed June 17, 2004; and 60/659,301, filed-March 7, 2005, both applications are incorporated in their entirety.

Field of the Invention The invention is in the field of cancer therapeutics. Specifically, the present invention is in the field of cancer therapeutics that promote apoptosis in tumor cells using isoxazolidine analogs. The isoxazolidine compounds of the invention bind to BcI proteins and block BcI anti-apoptotic function in cancer cells and tumor tissue expressing the BcI proteins. The compounds, and pharmaceutical compositions comprising these compounds, may be used in the treatment of cancerous disease either alone or in combination with chemotherapeutics or other drugs.

Background of the Invention

Apoptosis, or programmed cell death, is important for normal embryological/ ananatomical development, host defense and suppression of oncogenesis. Faulty regulation of apoptosis has been implicated in cancer and many other human diseases which result from an imbalance between the process of cell division and cell death. Bcl-2 was originally identified at the chromosomal breakpoint of t(14;18)-bearing B-cell lymphomas and belongs to a growing family of proteins which regulate apoptosis. (Gross, A; McDonnell, JM; Korsmeyer, S. J. BCL-2 family members and the mitochondria in apoptosis. Genes & Development 1999, 13, 1899-191 l,Cory, S.; Huang, D.C.S.; Adams, J.M. The Bcl-2 family: roles in cell survival and oncogenesis. Oncogene, 2003 22, 8590-8607. Danial, N.N.; Korsmeyer, S. J. Cell death: Critical control points. Cell 2004, 116, 205-218. Chao, D. T.; Korsmeyer, S. J. Bcl-2 family: regulators of cell death. Annu. Rev. Immunol. 1998, 16, 395-419).. Apoptosis, Christopher Potten, James Wilson, Cambridge University Press, 2004). The Bcl-2 family of proteins include both anti-apoptotic molecules, such as Bcl-2 and BcI-XL5 and pro-apoptotic molecules, such as Bax, Bak, Bid and Bad. Bcl-2 contributes to cancer cell progression by preventing normal cell turnover caused by physiological cell-death mechanisms. Over-expression of Bcl-2 has been observed in 70% of breast cancer and many other forms of cancer (Buolaniwini, J. K. Novel anticancer drug discovery. Curr. Opin. Chem. Biol. 1999, 3, 500-509). The expression levels of Bcl-2 proteins also correlate with resistance to a wide spectrum of chemotherapeutic drugs and γ- radiation therapy (Reed, J. C; Miyashita, T.; Takayama, S.; Wang, H.-G.; Sato, T.; Krajewski, S.; Aime-Sempe, C; Bodrug, S.; Kitada, S.; Hanada, M. Bcl-2 family proteins: Regulators of cell-death involved in the pathogenesis of cancer and resistance to therapy. J. Cell. Biochem. 1996, 60, 23-32; Reed, J. C. Bcl-2 family proteins: strategies for overcoming chemoresistance in cancer. Advances in Pharmocology 1997, 41, 501-553; Strasser, A.; Huang, D. C. S.; Vaux, D. L. The role of the Bcl-2/ced-9 gene family in cancer and general implications of defects in cell death control for tumorigenesis and resistance to chemotherapy. Biochem. Biophys. Acta 1997,1333, F151-F189; DiPaola, R. S.; Aisner, J. Overcoming Bcl-2- and p53-mediated resistance in prostate cancer. Semin. Oncol. 1999, 26, 112-116).

Members of the Bcl-2 family of proteins represent key regulators of apoptosis, with pro-apoptotic (e.g., Bax, Bak, Bid, Bim, Noxa, Puma) and anti-apoptotic function (e.g., Bcl-2, Bcl-xL, McI-I). Selective and competitive dimerization between pro-and anti- apoptotic members of the family determines the fate of a cell given pro-apoptotic stimulus. Although the precise roles of Bcl-2 and Bcl-xL in cancer are not completely understood, there are several lines of evidence that suggest that Bcl-2 and Bcl-xL not only contribute to cancer progression by preventing normal cell turnover, but also play a role in the resistance of cancer cells to current cancer treatments. Experimental over-expression of Bcl-2 (Bcl- xL) renders cancer cells resistant to a wide spectrum of chemotherapeutic agents and radiation (Bcl-2 family proteins: Regulators of cell-death involved in the pathogenesis of cancer and resistance to therapy. J. Cell. Biochem. 1996, 60, 23-32; Reed, J. C). Bcl-2 and/or Bcl-xL are over-expressed in more than 50% of all tumors as shown below (from Wang, S.; Yang, D.; Lippman, M.E. Targeting Bcl-2 and Bcl-xL with nonpeptidic small- molecule antagonists. Seminars in Oncology, 2003, 5, 133-142).

Biological approaches to modulating Bcl-2 function using anti-sense oligonucleotides or single-chain antibodies have been shown to enhance tumor cell chemosensitivity (Ziegler, A.; Luedke, G. H.; Fabbro, D.; Altmann, K. H.; Stahel, R. A.; Zangemeister-Wittke, U. Induction of apoptosis in small-cell lung cancer cells by an antisense oligodeoxynucleotide targeting the Bcl-2 coding sequence. J. Natl. Cancer. Inst. 1997, 89, 1027-1036; Webb, A.; Cunningham, D.; Cotter, F.; Clarke, P. A.; Di Stefano, F.; Ross, P.; Corpo, M.; Dziewanowska, Z. Bcl-2 antisense therapy in patients with non- hodgkin lymphoma. Lancet 1997, 349, 1137-1141; Cotter, F. E. Phase I clinical and pharmacokinetic study of Bcl-2 antisense oligonucleotide therapy in patients with non- hodgkin's lymphoma. J. Clin. Oncol. 2000, 18, 1812-1823; Piche, A.; Grim, J.; Rancourt, C; Gomez-Navarro, J.; Reed, J. C; Curiel, D. T. Modulation of Bcl-2 protein levels by an intracellular anti-Bcl-2 single-chain antibody increases drug-induced cytotoxicity in the breast cancer cell line MCF-7. Cancer Res. 1998, 58, 2134-2140). It has been shown that an anti-sense oligonucleotide (G3139) (Raynaud, F. L; Orr, R. M.; Goddard, P. M.; Lacey, H. A.; Lancashire, H.; Judson, I. R.; Beck, T.; Bryan, B.; Cotter, F. E. Pharmacokinetics of G3139, a phosphorothioate oligodeoxynucleotide antisense to Bcl-2, after intravenous administration or continuous subcutaneous infusion to mice. J. Pharmacol. Exp. Ther. 1997, 281, 420-427), designed to hybridize to sequence in Bcl-2 mRNA, inhibits Bcl-2 expression, induces apoptosis and inhibits cell growth in human breast cancer cells having Bcl-2 over-expression (Chen, H. X., Marchall, J. L., Trocky, N., Baidas, S., Rizvi, N., Ling, Y., Bhagava, P., Lippman, M. E., Yang, D., and Hayes, D. F. A Phase I study of Bcl-2 antisense G3139 (Genta) and weekly docetaxel in patients with advanced breast cancer and other solid tumors. Proceedings of American Society of Clinical Oncology, 2000). Importantly, synergistic effects and complete tumor regression were observed in vivo in the combined treatments of G3139 with docetaxel. Therefore, Bcl-2 represents a highly attractive target for the development of a novel therapy for the treatment of many forms of cancers.

Limitations associated with the use of large molecules, such as oligonucleotides, proteins and polypeptides, as therapeutic agents include poor oral availability, poor in vivo stability, and high cost. More desirable therapeutics would be non-peptide, cell-permeable small molecules that bind to Bcl-2 and block the anti-apoptotic function in cancer and promote cell-death in tumors.

Various small molecules have been shown to inhibit the function of Bcl-2. For example, acyl sulfonamides were shown to inhibit the function of Bcl-2 and Bcl-xL in biochemical and in vitro assays. Nature (2005) 435, 677-681. Nevertheless, the need exists for additional small organic molecules that bind to Bcl-2 and block its anti-apoptotic function in cancer and promote cell death in tumors. The present invention fulfills this need and has other related advantages.

Summary of the Invention

One aspect of the present invention relates to isoxazolidine compounds. In certain instances, the nitrogen atom of the isoxazolidine ring is bonded to a substituted aralkyl group. In certain instances, the substituted aralkyl group is a substituted benzyl group. In certain instances, the isoxazolidine ring is substituted with a hydroxy methyl or hydroxy ethyl group. In certain instances, the isoxazolidine ring is substituted with a hydroxy methyl and a hydroxy ethyl group. In certain instances, the isoxazolidine ring is substituted with an amide group. The present invention further provides pharmaceutically active salts of the above-mentioned isoxazolidine compounds. Another aspect of the present invention relates to pharmaceutical compositions comprising an isoxazolidine compound of the invention. Another aspect of the present invention relates to a method of using the above compounds, or pharmaceutically active salts thereof, alone or in combination with other agents to treat cancer. Specifically, the invention provides a therapeutic method comprising treating a condition characterized by the pathological proliferation of mammalian cells, such as tumors cells, (e.g., breast cancer and myeloid leukemia), by administering to a mammal or a human afflicted with such a condition an effective amount of a compound of the present invention. In certain instances, the compound of the present invention is administered with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

Brief Description of the Drawings

Figure 1 depicts the results of an efficacy study of compound 221 in an RL tumor ' xenograft model in SCDD/NOD mice.

Detailed Description of the Invention

The present invention generally relates to isoxazolidine compounds useful for treating cancer. The isoxazolidine compounds of the invention bind to one or more BcI proteins and block BcI anti-apoptotic function in cancer cells and tumor tissue that express the BcI protein. In certain embodiments, certain compounds of the invention selectively inhibit the anti-apoptotic activity of only one member of the Bcl-2 subfamily of anti- apoptotic proteins. The isoxazolidine compounds of the invention can be used to treat a patient suffering from a disease related to BcI. In certain instances, the isoxazolidine compounds of the invention are used to treat a patient suffering from cancer. The isoxazolidine compounds of the invention can be administered to a patient in the form of a pharmaceutical composition. The pharmaceutical composition comprises an isoxazolidine compound of the invention and one or more pharmaceutically acceptable excipients. In certain instances, the pharmaceutical composition comprises an isoxazolidine compound of the invention, a chemotherapeutic agent, and one or more pharamaceutically acceptable excipients. In certain instances, the chemotherapetic agent is Docetaxel, Paclitaxel, cisplatin, 5-FU, Doxrubincin, epipodophyllotoxin, camptothecin, 17- AAG, or cyclophosphamide.

Synthesis of Isoxazolidine Compounds

The isoxazolidine compounds of the invention can be prepared using a [3+2] cycloaddition reaction between a nitrone and an alkene. The nitrone substrate and alkene may contain functional groups suitable for chemical derivatization following synthesis of the isoxazolidine core. In certain instances, a Lewis acid is added to the reaction, hi a preferred embodiment, the Lewis acid is Ti(Oz-Pr)4. In certain instances, the reaction mixture is subjected to microwave radiation. In general, the subject reactions are carried out in a liquid reaction medium, but can be carried out on a solid support. The reactions may be conducted in an aprotic solvent, preferably one in which the reaction ingredients are substantially soluble. Suitable solvents include ethers, such as diethyl ether, 1,2- dimethoxyethane, diglyme, t-butyl methyl ether, tetrahydrofuran and the like; halogenated solvents, such as chloroform, dichloromethane, dichloroethane, chlorobenzene, carbon tetrachloride, and the like; aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon solvents, such as benzene, xylene, toluene, hexane, pentane and the like; esters and ketones, such as ethyl acetate, acetone, and 2-butanone; polar aprotic solvents, such as acetonitrile, dimethylsulfoxide, dimethylformamide, pyridine, and the like; or combinations of two or more solvents. The reactions can be conducted at a variety of temperatures. Generally, reactions conducted at lower temperatures will take a longer to reach completion. In certain instances, the cycloaddition reaction is conducted in the range of about 15 0C to about 60 0C. In certain instances, the cycloaddition reaction is conducted in the range of about 15 0C to about 30 0C. In certain instances, the cycloaddition reaction is conducted at about room temperature, hi certain instances, the cycloaddition reaction is conducted in the range of about 80 0C to about 150 0C. In certain instances, the cycloaddition reaction is conducted in the range of about 90 0C to about 120 0C. In certain instances, the cycloaddition reaction is conducted in the range of about 95 0C to about 105 0C. hi certain instances, the cycloaddition reaction is conducted using a substrate attached to a solid support. Following synthesis of the isoxazolidine core, the isoxazolidine compound may be derivatized using a variety of functionalization reactions known in the art. Representative examples include palladium coupling reactions to alkenylhalides or aryl halides, oxidations, reductions, reactions with nucleophiles, reactions with electrophiles, pericyclic reactions, installation of protecting groups, removal of protecting groups, and the like.

Biological Activity Analysis The following in vitro binding and cellular assays . can be used to determine the activity and specificity of compounds of the present invention to bind to Bcl-2 and inhibit Bcl-2 function in a cell.

Bcl-2 Binding Assay Bcl-2 and Bcl-xL binding can be determined using a variety of known methods. One such assay is a sensitive and quantitative in vitro binding assay using fluorescence polarization (FP) described by Wang, J. -L.; Zhang, Z -J.; Choksi, S.; Sjam. S.; Lu, Z.; Croce, C. M.; Alnemri, E. S.; Komgold, R.; Huang, Z. Cell permeable Bcl-2 binding peptides: a chemical approach to apoptosis induction in tumor cells. Cancer Res. 2000, 60, 1498-1502). Cell based assays The ability of isoxazolidine compounds of the present invention to inhibit cell- viability in cancer cells with Bcl-2 protein over-expression was demonstrated. When RL- cells are exposed to isoxazolidine compounds of the present invention, the inhibitors show a dose-dependent cell-killing in the Alamar blue cytoxicity assay with IC50 values of from about 100 μM to about 1 μM (See Examples). When Panel cells are exposed to the isoxazolidine compounds of the present invention in combination with camptothecin, the inhibitors show a synergistic dose-dependent cell killing in the propidium iodide exclusion cell survival assay with IC50 values of from about 100 μM to about 1 μM (See Examples). Bcl-2 inhibitors have been shown to be active against a number of cancer cell lines as single agent, including, but not limited to, breast cancer (US 2003/0119894, published PCT applications WO 02/097053 and WO 02/13833), lymphomas {Nature (2005) 435, 677- 681), small cell lung cancer {Nature (2005) 435, 677-681), head and neck cancer (published PCT application WO 02/097053), and leukemias (published PCT application WO 02/13833). Bcl-2 inhibitors have been shown to be active against a number of cancer cell lines in combination with other anticancer agents and radiation, including, but not limited to, breast cancer (With docetaxel, published PCT application WO 02/097053), prostate cancer (With docetaxel, published PCT application WO 02/097053), head and neck cancer (With docetaxel, published PCT application WO 02/097053), and non small-cell lung cancer (With paclitaxel, Nature (2005) 435, 677-681). In addition to the aforementioned combination chemotherapeutics, small molecule inhibitors of Bcl-2 proteins display synergy with other anticancer agents, including, but not limited to etoposide, doxorubicin, cisplatin, paclitaxel, and radiation {Nature (2005) 435, 677-681).

Methods of Therapy and Treatment The present invention further provides methods for treating and reducing the severity of cancer as well as other BcI mediated disorders or conditions. Cancers or neoplastic diseases and related disorders that can be treated by administration of compounds and compositions of the present invention, include, but are not limited to those listed in Table 1 (for a review of such disorders, see Fishman et al., 1985, Medicine, 2d Ed., J. B. Lippincott Co., Philadelphia): TABLE l CANCERS AND NEOPLASTIC DISORDERS

acute leukemia acute lymphocytic leukemia acute myelocytic leukemia myeloblastic promyelocyte myelomonocytic monocytic erythroleukemia chronic leukemia chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia chronic lymphocytic leukemia Polycythemia vera Lymphoma Hodgkin's disease non-Hodgkήϊs disease Multiple myeloma Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia Heavy chain disease Solid tumors sarcomas and carcinomas fibrosarcoma myxosarcoma liposarcoma chondrosarcoma osteogenic sarcoma chordoma angiosarcoma lymphangiosarcoma lymphangioendotheliosarcoma synovioma mesothelioma Ewing's tumor leiomyosarcoma rhabdomyosarcoma colon carcinoma pancreatic cancer breast cancer ovarian cancer prostate cancer squamous cell carcinoma basal cell carcinoma adenocarcinoma sweat gland carcinoma sebaceous gland carcinoma papillary carcinoma papillary adenocarcinomas cystadenocarcinoma medullary carcinoma bronchogenic carcinoma renal cell carcinoma hepatoma bile duct carcinoma choriocarcinoma seminoma embryonal carcinoma Wilms' tumor cervical cancer uterine cancer testicular tumor lung carcinoma small cell lung carcinoma bladder carcinoma epithelial carcinoma glioma astrocytoma medulloblastoma craniopharyngioma ependymoma pinealoma hemangioblastoma acoustic neuroma oligodendroglioma meningioma melanoma neuroblastoma retinoblastoma

In a preferred embodiment, the compounds of the present invention are used to treat cancers including, but not limited to lymphomas (preferably follicular lymphoma, diffuse large B-cell lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, or chronic lymphocytic leukemia), prostrate cancer (more preferably hormone insensitive), breast cancer (preferably estrogen receptor positive), neuroblastoma, colorectal, endometrial, ovarian, lung (preferably small cell), hepatocellular carcinoma, multiple myeloma, head and neck or testicular cancer (preferably germ cell).

Treatment of Cancer in Combination with Chemotherapy or Radiotherapy In certain embodiments, one or more compounds of the present invention are used to treat or prevent cancer or neoplastic disease in combination with one or more anti-cancer, chemotherapeutic agents including, but not limited to, methotrexate, taxol, mercaptopurine, thioguanine, hydroxyurea, cytarabine, cyclophosphamide, ifosfamide, nitrosoureas, cisplatin, carboplatin, mitomycin, dacarbazine, procarbizine, etoposides, prednisolone, dexamethasone, cytarbine, campathecins, bleomycin, doxorubicin, idarubicin, daunorubicin, dactinomycin, plicamycin, mitoxantrone, asparaginase, vinblastine, vincristine, vinorelbine, paclitaxel, and docetaxel. In a preferred embodiment, one or more compound of the present invention is used to treat or prevent cancer or neoplastic disease in combination with one or more chemotherapeutic or other anti-cancer agents including, but not limited to those presented in Table 2. TABLE 2 CHEMOTHERAPEUTICS AND OTHER ANTI-CANCER AGENTS

Radiation: γ-radiation Alkylating aRents

Nitrogen mustards: cyclophosphamide Ifosfamide trofosfamide Chlorambucil Estramustine melphalan Nitrosoureas: carmustine (BCNU) Lomustine (CCNU) Alkylsulphonates busulfan Treosulfan Triazenes: Dacarbazine Platinum containing compounds: Cisplatin carboplatin oxaplatin Plant Alkaloids

Vinca alkaloids: vincristine Vinblastine Vindesine Vinorelbine Taxoids: paclitaxel Docetaxol DNA Topoisomerase Inhibitors

Epipodophyllins : etoposide Teniposide Topotecan 9-aminocamptothecin campto irinotecan crisnatol mytomycins

mytomycin C Mytomycin C Anti-metabolites Anti-folates:

DHFR inhibitors: methotrexate Trimetrexate IMP dehydrogenase Inhibitors: mycophenolic acid Tiazofurin Ribavirin EICAR Ribonuclotide reductase Inhibitors: hydroxyurea deferoxamine Pyrimidine analogs:

Uracil analogs 5-Fluorouracil Floxuridine Doxifluridine Ratitrexed capecitabine Cytosine analogs cytarabine (ara C) Cytosine arabinoside fludarabine Purine analogs: mercaptopurine Thioguanine Hormonal therapies: Receptor antagonists:

Anti-estrogens Tamoxifen Raloxifene megestrol LHRH agonists: goscrclin Leuprolide acetate Anti-androgens: flutamide bicalutamide Retinoids/Deltoids

Vitamin D3 analogs: EB 1089 CB 1093 KH 1060 Photodyamic therapies: vertoporfm (BPD-MA) Phthalocyanine photosensitizer Pc4 Demethoxy-hypocrellin A (2BA-2-DMHA) Cytokines: Interferon α Interferon γ Tumor necrosis factor Others:

Isoprenylation inhibitors: Lovastatin Dopaminergic neurotoxins: l-methyl-4-phenylpyridinium ion Cell cycle inhibitors: staurosporine Actinomycins: Actinomycin D Dactinomycin Bleomycins: bleomycin A2 Bleomycin B2 Peplomycin Anthracyclines: daunorubicin Doxorubicin (adriamycin) Idarubicin Epirubicin Pirarubicin Zorubicin Mitoxantrone MDR inhibitors: verapamil Ca2+ATPase inhibitors: thapsigargin Antibodies Avastin Erbitux Rituxan Others Prednisilone tnatinib Thalidomide Lenalidomide Bortezomib Gemcitabine Erlotinib Gefitinib Sorafenib Sutinib

The chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation therapy can be administered according to therapeutic protocols well known in the art. It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the administration of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation therapy can be varied depending on the disease being treated and the known effects of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation therapy on that disease. Also, in accordance with the knowledge of the skilled clinician, the therapeutic protocols (e.g., dosage amounts and times of administration) can be varied in view of the observed effects of the administered therapeutic agents (i.e., antineoplastic agent or radiation) on the patient, and in view of the observed responses of the disease to the administered therapeutic agents. Also, in general, compounds of the present invention and the chemotherapeutic agent do not have to be administered in the same pharmaceutical composition, and may, because of different physical and chemical characteristics, have to be administered by different routes. For example, compounds of the present invention may be administered intravenously to generate and maintain good blood levels, while the chemotherapeutic agent may be administered orally. The determination of the mode of administration and the advisability of administration, where possible, in the same pharmaceutical composition, is well within the knowledge of the skilled clinician. The initial administration can be made according to established protocols known in the art, and then, based upon the observed effects, the dosage, modes of administration and times of administration can be modified by the skilled clinician. The particular choice of chemotherapeutic agent or radiation will depend upon the diagnosis of the attending physicians and their judgment of the condition of the patient and the appropriate treatment protocol. A compound of the present invention, and chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation may be administered concurrently (e.g., simultaneously, essentially simultaneously or within the same treatment protocol) or sequentially, depending upon the nature of the proliferative disease, the condition of the patient, and the actual choice of chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation to be administered in conjunction (i.e., within a single treatment protocol) with a compound of the present invention. If a compound of the present invention, and the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation are not administered simultaneously or essentially simultaneously, then the optimum order of administration of the compound of the present invention, and the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation, may be different for different tumors. Thus, in certain situations the compound of the present invention may be administered first followed by the administration of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation; and in other situations the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation may be administered first followed by the administration of a compound of the present invention. This alternate administration may be repeated during a single treatment protocol. The determination of the order of administration, and the number of repetitions of administration of each therapeutic agent during a treatment protocol, is well within the knowledge of the skilled physician after evaluation of the disease being treated and the condition of the patient. For example, the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation may be administered first, especially if it is a cytotoxic agent, and then the treatment continued with the administration of a compound of the present invention followed, where determined advantageous, by the administration of the chemotherapeutic agent and/or radiation, and so on until the treatment protocol is complete. Thus, in accordance with experience and knowledge, the practicing physician can modify each protocol for the administration of a component (therapeutic agent, i.e., compound of the present invention, chemotherapeutic agent or radiation) of the treatment according to the individual patient's needs, as the treatment proceeds.

Definitions

For convenience, certain terms employed in the specification, examples, and appended claims are collected here.

The terms "co-administration" and "co-administering" refer to both concurrent administration (administration of two or more therapeutic agents at the same time) and time varied administration (administration of one or more therapeutic agents at a time different from that of the administration of an additional therapeutic agent or agents), as long as the therapeutic agents are present in the patient to some extent at the same time. The term "heteroatom" as used herein means an atom of any element other than carbon or hydrogen. Preferred heteroatoms are boron, nitrogen, oxygen, phosphorus, sulfur and selenium.

The term "alkyl" refers to the radical of saturated aliphatic groups, including straight-chain alkyl groups, branched-chain alkyl groups, cycloalkyl (alicyclic) groups, alkyl substituted cycloalkyl groups, and cycloalkyl substituted alkyl groups. In preferred embodiments, a straight chain or'branched chairLalkyl has 3(λ or fewer carbon atoms in its backbone (e.g., C1-C30 for straight chain, C3-C30 for branched chain), and more preferably 20 or fewer. Likewise, preferred cycloalkyls have from 3-10 carbon atoms in their ring structure, and more preferably have 5, 6 or 7 carbons in the ring structure.

Unless the number of carbons is otherwise specified, "lower alkyl" as used herein means an alkyl group, as defined above, but having from one to ten carbons, more preferably from one to six carbon atoms in its backbone structure. Likewise, "lower alkenyl" and "lower alkynyl" have similar chain lengths. Preferred alkyl groups are lower alkyls. In preferred embodiments, a substituent designated herein as alkyl is a lower alkyl.

The term "haloalkyl", as used herein, refers to an alkyl group where anywhere from 1 to all hydgrogens have been replaced with a halide. A "perhaloalkyl" is where all of the hydrogens have been replaced with a halide.

The term "aralkyl", as used herein, refers to an alkyl group substituted with an aryl group (e.g., an aromatic or heteroaromatic group).

The terms "alkenyl" and "alkynyl" refer to unsaturated aliphatic groups analogous in length and possible substitution to the alkyls described above, but that contain at least one double or triple bond respectively.

The term "aryl" as used herein includes 5-, 6- and 7-membered single-ring aromatic groups that may include from zero to four heteroatoms, for example, benzene, anthracene, naphthalene, pyrene, pyrrole, furan, thiophene, imidazole, oxazole, thiazole, triazole, pyrazole, pyridine, pyrazihe, pyridazine and pyrimidine, and the like. Those aryl groups having heteroatoms in the ring structure may also be referred to as "aryl heterocycles" or "heteroaromatics." The aromatic ring can be substituted at one or more ring positions with such substituents as described above, for example, halogen, azide, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, sulfonamido, ketone, aldehyde, ester, heterocyclyl, aromatic or heteroaromatic moieties, -CF3, -CN, or the like. The term "aryl" also includes polycyclic ring systems having two or more cyclic rings in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings (the rings are "fused rings") wherein at least one of the rings is aromatic, e.g., the other cyclic rings can be cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls.

The terms ortho, meta and para apply to 1,2-, 1,3- and 1,4-disubstituted benzenes, respectively. For example, the names 1,2-dimethylbenzene and ort&o-dimethylbenzene are synonymous.

The terms "heterocyclyl" or "heterocyclic group" refer to 3- to 10-membered ring structures, more preferably 3- to 7-membered rings, whose ring structures include one to four heteroatoms. Heterocycles can also be polycycles. Heterocyclyl groups include, for example, thiophene, thianthrene, furan, pyran, isobenzofuran, chromene, xanthene, phenoxathiin, pyrrole, imidazole, pyrazole, isothiazole, isoxazole, pyridine, pyrazine, pyrimidine, pyridazine, indolizine, isoindole, indole, indazole, purine, quinolizine, isoquinoline, quinoline, phthalazine, naphthyridine, quinoxaline, quinazoline, cinnoline, pteridine, carbazole, carboline, phenanthridine, acridine, pyrimidine, phenanthroline, phenazine, phenarsazine, phenothiazine, furazan, phenoxazine, pyrrolidine, oxolane, thiolane, oxazole, piperidine, piperazine, morpholine, lactones, lactams such as azetidinones and pyrrolidinones, sultams, sultones, and the like. The heterocyclic ring can be substituted at one or more positions with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, -CF3, -CN, or the like.

The terms "polycyclyl" or "polycyclic group" refer to two or more rings (e.g., cycloalkyls, cycloalkenyls, cycloalkynyls, aryls and/or heterocyclyls) in which two or more carbons are common to two adjoining rings, e.g., the rings are "fused rings". Rings that are joined through non-adjacent atoms are termed "bridged" rings. Each of the rings of the polycycle can be substituted with such substituents as described above, as for example, halogen, alkyl, aralkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, hydroxyl, amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, imino, amido, phosphonate, phosphinate, carbonyl, carboxyl, silyl, ether, alkylthio, sulfonyl, ketone, aldehyde, ester, a heterocyclyl, an aromatic or heteroaromatic moiety, - CF3, -CN, or the like.

As used herein, the term "nitro" means -NO2; the term "halogen" designates -F, -Cl, -Br or -I; the term "sulfhydryl" means -SH; the term "hydroxyl" means -OH; and the term "sulfonyl" means -SO2--

The terms "amine" and "amino" are art-recognized and refer to both unsubstituted and substituted amines, e.g., a moiety that may be represented by the general formulas: R50 R50 I / I + N N R53 R51 R52 wherein R50, R51 and R52 each independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, - (CH2)m-R61, or R50 and R51, taken together with the N atom to which they are attached complete a heterocycle having from 4 to 8 atoms in the ring structure; R61 represents an aryl, a cycloalkyl, a cycloalkenyl, a heterocycle or a polycycle; and m is zero or an integer in the range of 1 to 8. In certain embodiments, only one of R50 or R51 may be a carbonyl, e.g., R50, R51 and the nitrogen together do not form an imide. In other embodiments, R50 and R51 (and optionally R52) each independently represent a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, or -(CH2)m-R61. Thus, the term "alkylamine" includes an amine group, as defined above, having a substituted or unsubstituted alkyl attached thereto, i.e., at least one of R50 and R51 is an alkyl group.

The term "acylamino" is art-recognized and refers to a moiety that may be represented by the general formula:

wherein R50 is as defined above, and R54 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or (CH2)m-R61, where m and R61 are as defined above. The term "amido" is art recognized as an amino-substituted carbonyl and includes a moiety that may be represented by the general formula:

1

wherein R50 and R51 are as defined above. Certain embodiments of the amide in the present invention will not include imides which may be unstable.

The term "alkylthio" refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having a sulfur radical attached thereto. In certain embodiments, the "alkylthio" moiety is represented by one of -S-alkyl, -S-alkenyl, -S-alkynyl, and -S-(CH2)m-R61, wherein m and R61 are defined above. Representative alkylthio groups include methylthio, ethyl thio, and the like.

The term "carboxyl" is art recognized and includes such moieties as may be represented by the general formulas:

wherein X50 is a bond or represents an oxygen or a sulfur, and R55 and R56 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl, -(CH2)m-R61or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt, R56 represents a hydrogen, an alkyl, an alkenyl or -(CH2)m-R61, where m and R61 are defined above. Where X50 is an oxygen and R55 or R56 is not hydrogen, the formula represents an "ester". Where X50 is an oxygen, and R55 is as defined above, the moiety is referred to herein as a carboxyl group, and particularly when R55 is a hydrogen, the formula represents a "carboxylic acid". Where X50 is an oxygen, and R56 is hydrogen, the formula represents a "formate". In general, where the oxygen atom of the above formula is replaced by sulfur, the formula represents a "thiolcarbonyl" group. Where X50 is a sulfur and R55 or R56 is not hydrogen, the formula represents a "thiolester." Where X50 is a sulfur and R55 is hydrogen, the formula represents a "thiolcarboxylic acid." Where X50 is a sulfur and R56 is hydrogen, the formula represents a "thiolformate." On the other hand, where X50 is a bond, and R55 is not hydrogen, the above formula represents a "ketone" group. Where X50 is a bond, and R55 is hydrogen, the above formula represents an "aldehyde" group.

The terms "alkoxyl" or "alkoxy" as used herein refers to an alkyl group, as defined above, having an oxygen radical attached thereto. Representative alkoxyl groups include methoxy, ethoxy, propyloxy, tert-butoxy and the like. An "ether" is two hydrocarbons covalently linked by an oxygen. Accordingly, the substituent of an alkyl that renders that ~alkyLan ether is or resembles an alkoxyl, such as. can be represented by one of -O-alkyl, -O- alkenyl, -O-alkynyl, -O-(CH2)m-R8> where m and Rg are described above.

The term "sulfonate" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O Il S-OR41 Il O

in which R44 is an electron pair, hydrogen, alkyl, cycloalkyl, or aryl.

The terms triflyl, tosyl, mesyl, and nonaflyl are art-recognized and refer to trifluoromethanesulfonyl, /j-toluenesulfonyl, methanesulfonyl, and nonafluorobutanesulfonyl groups, respectively. The terms triflate, tosylate, mesylate, and nonaflate are art-recognized and refer to trifluoromethanesulfonate ester, /?-toluenesulfonate ester, methanesulfonate ester, and nonafluorobutanesulfonate ester functional groups and molecules that contain said groups, respectively.

The term "carbamoyl" refers to -0(C=O)NRR', where R and R' are independently H, aliphatic groups, aryl groups or heteroaryl groups.

The term "alkylamino" refers to -NHR, where R is an alkyl group.

The term "dialkylamino" refers to -NRR', where both R and R' are alkyl groups.

The term "hydroxyalkyl" refers to -R-OH, where R is an aliphatic group.

The term "aminoalkyl" refers to -R-NH2, where R is an aliphatic group.

The term "alkylaminoalkyl" refers to -R-NH-R', where both R and R' are aliphatic groups. The term "dialkylaminoalkyl" refers to -R-N(R')-R", where R, R', and R" are aliphatic groups.

The term "arylaminoalkyl" refers to -R-NH-R, where R is an aliphatic and R' is an aryl group.

The term "oxo" refers to a carbonyl oxygen (=0).

The term "diradical" or "bivalent" as used herein are used interechangeably and refer to any of a series of divalent groups from alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, aϊkylamino, alkoxyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, and heteroaralkyl

groups. For example, \ is a bivalent alkyl or alkyl diradical; \ is also a / A bivalent alkyl or alkyl diradical; X-=/ is a bivalent aryl or aryl diradical;

is a bivalent aralkyl or aralkyl diradical; and is a bivalent (alkyl)heteroaralkyl or (alkyl)heteroaralkyl diradical.

The abbreviations Me, Et, Ph, Tf, Nf, Ts, Ms represent methyl, ethyl, phenyl, trifluoromethanesulfonyl, nonafluorobutanesulfonyl, /»-toluenesulfonyl and methanesulfonyl, respectively. A more comprehensive list of the abbreviations utilized by organic chemists of ordinary skill in the art appears in the first issue of each volume of the Journal of Organic Chemistry; this list is typically presented in a table entitled Standard List of Abbreviations. The abbreviations contained in said list, and all abbreviations utilized by organic chemists of ordinary skill in the art are hereby incorporated by reference. The term "sulfate" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O Il -0-S-OR41 O in which R41 is as defined above. The term "sulfonylamino" is art recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O Il N— S-R I O R The term "sulfamoyl" is art-recognized and includes a moiety that can be represented by the general formula:

The term "sulfonyl", as used herein, refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O Il -S-R44 O in which R44 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aryl, or heteroaryl. The term "sulfoxido" as used herein, refers to a moiety that can be represented by the general formula: O Il -S-R44

in which R44 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclyl, aralkyl, or aryl.

A "selenoalkyl" refers to an alkyl group having a substituted seleno group attached thereto. Exemplary "selenoethers" which may be substituted on the alkyl are selected from one of -Se-alkyl, -Se-alkenyl, -Se-alkynyl, and -Se-(CH2)m-R-7> m and R7 being defined above.

Analogous substitutions can be made to alkenyl and alkynyl groups to produce, for example, aminoalkenyls, aminoalkynyls, amidoalkenyls, amidoalkynyls, iminoalkenyls, iminoalkynyls, thioalkenyls, thioalkynyls, carbonyl-substituted alkenyls or alkynyls. As used herein, the definition of each expression, e.g., alkyl, m, n, etc., when it occurs more than once in any structure, is intended to be independent of its definition elsewhere in the same structure.

It will be understood that "substitution" or "substituted with" includes the implicit proviso that such substitution is in accordance with permitted valence of the substituted atom and the substituent, and that the substitution results in a stable compound, e.g., which does not spontaneously undergo transformation such- as by rearrangement, xyclization, elimination, etc.

As used herein, the term "substituted" is contemplated to include all permissible substituents of organic compounds. In a broad aspect, the permissible substituents include acyclic and cyclic, branched and unbranched, carbocyclic and heterocyclic, aromatic and nonaromatic substituents of organic compounds. Illustrative substituents include, for example, those described herein above. The permissible substituents can be one or more and the same or different for appropriate organic compounds. For purposes of this invention, the heteroatoms such as nitrogen may have hydrogen substituents and/or any permissible substituents of organic compounds described herein which satisfy the valences of the heteroatoms. This invention is not intended to be limited in any manner by the permissible substituents of organic compounds.

The phrase "protecting group" as used herein means temporary substituents which protect a potentially reactive functional group from undesired chemical transformations. Examples of such protecting groups include esters of carboxylic acids, silyl ethers of alcohols, and acetals and ketals of aldehydes and ketones, respectively. The field of protecting group chemistry has been reviewed (Greene, T.W.; Wuts, P.G.M. Protective Groups in Organic Synthesis, 2" ed.; Wiley: New York, 1991). Protected forms of the inventive compounds are included within the scope of this invention.

Certain compounds of the present invention may exist in particular geometric or stereoisomeric forms. The present invention contemplates all such compounds, including cis- and trans-isomers, R- and S-enantiomers, diastereomers, (D)-isomers, (L)-isomers, the racemic mixtures thereof, and other mixtures thereof, as falling within the scope of the invention. Additional asymmetric carbon atoms may be present in a substituent such as an alkyl group. All such isomers, as well as mixtures thereof, are intended to be included in this invention. If, for instance, a particular enantiomer of a compound of the present invention is desired, it may be prepared by asymmetric synthesis, or by derivation with a chiral auxiliary, where the resulting diastereomeric mixture is separated and the auxiliary group cleaved to provide the pure desired enantiomers. Alternatively, where the molecule contains a basic functional group, such as amino, or an acidic functional group, such as carboxyl, diastereomeric salts are formed with an appropriate optically-active acid or base, followed by resolution of the diastereomers thus formed by fractional crystallization or chromatographic means well known in the art, and subsequent recovery of the pure enantiomers.

Contemplated equivalents of the compounds described above include compounds which otherwise correspond thereto, and which have the same general properties thereof (e.g., functioning as analgesics), wherein one or more simple variations of substituents are made which do not adversely affect the efficacy of the compound in binding to sigma receptors. In general, the compounds of the present invention may be prepared by the methods illustrated in the general reaction schemes as, for example, described below, or by modifications thereof, using readily available starting materials, reagents and conventional synthesis procedures. In these reactions, it is also possible to make use of variants which are in themselves known, but are not mentioned here.

For purposes of this invention, the chemical elements are identified in accordance with the Periodic Table of the Elements, CAS version, Handbook of Chemistry and Physics, 67th Ed., 1986-87, inside cover. The term "subject" as used herein, refers to an animal, typically a mammal or a human, that has been the object of treatment, observation, and/or experiment. When the term is used in conjunction with administration of a compound or drug, then the subject has been the object of treatment, observation, and/or administration of the compound or drug. The term "therapeutically effective amount" as used herein, means that amount of active compound or pharmaceutical agent that elicits the biological or medicinal response in a cell culture, tissue system, animal, or human that is being sought by a researcher, veterinarian, clinician, or physician, which includes alleviation of the symptoms of the disease, condition, or disorder being treated. In the present invention, such an amount will be sufficient to bind to bcl-2 in a cell and inhibit at least part of the anti-apoptotic activity of the protein. Such an amount may be sufficient to provide therapeutic effectiveness in a patient or may serve to sensitize the cell to treatment with another anticancer agent. The term "composition" is intended to encompass a product comprising the specified ingredients in the specified amounts, as well as any product that results, directly or indirectly, from combinations of the specified ingredients in the specified amounts. The term "pharmaceutically acceptable carrier" refers to a medium that is used to prepare a desired dosage form of a compound. A pharmaceutically acceptable carrier can include one or more solvents, diluents, or other liquid vehicles; dispersion or suspension aids; surface active agents; isotonic agents; thickening or emulsifying agents; preservatives; solid binders; lubricants; and the like. Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, Fifteenth Edition, E. W. Martin (Mack Publishing Co., Easton, Pa., 1975) and Handbook of Pharmaceutical Excipients, Third Edition, A. H. Kibbe ed. (American Pharmaceutical Assoc. 2000), disclose various carriers used in formulating pharmaceutical compositions and known techniques for the preparation thereof. The phrases "Bel-mediated disorder" and "disorder mediated by cells expressing BcI proteins" refer to pathological and disease conditions in which a BcI protein plays a role. Such roles can be directly related to the pathological condition or can be indirectly related to the condition. The feature common to this class of conditions is that they can be ameliorated by inhibiting the activity of, function of, or association with BcI proteins. As used herein, the terms "BcI" and "BcI protein" are intended to encompass one or more of the Bcl-2 subfamily of anti-apoptotic proteins Bcl-2, Bcl-w, McI-I, BcI-XL, Al, BfIl, BcI-B, BOO/DIVA, and their homologues.

Compounds of the Invention

One aspect of the present invention relates to a compound represented by formula 1:

1

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or hydrates thereof, wherein

Y is -C(R9)2-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, or -C(=NR10)-;

X is -N(Rn)-, an optionally substituted phenyl group, or a bond;

XI represents independently for each occurrence O, N(R10), or S;

m is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;

n represents independently for each occurrence 0, I72, 3, 4, 5, or 6;

Ri is alkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, has the formula Ia:

Ia

wherein

Ri2 represents independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or aralkyl; wherein any two instances OfRi2 may be connected by a covalent bond;

- Ar1 is a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl with 6-14 ring atoms; or a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl with 5-14 ring atoms, of which one, two or three ring atoms are independently S, O or N;

W is a bond; or bivalent alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl chain;

Z is a bond, -(C(Ri2)2)n-, or -X'(C(Ri2)2)n-;

R13 and R14 are independently H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, or -A1^-A3; or R13 and R14 taken together form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring; or Ri3 and Ri4 taken together with Ri5 form a cycloalkenyl ring, aromatic ring, or heteroaromatic ring;

Ri5 is halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryl, aryloxy, acyloxy, -N(RiO)2, acylamino, aralkyl, nitro, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -CORi0, -CO2RiO, - N(R10)CO2Ri0, -OC(O)N(R,0)2, -N(Ri0)SO2Ri9, -N(RiO)C(X')N(Ri9)2, - N(Rio)(C(R9)2)n-A1-A2-A3, -(C(R9)2)n-halogen, or -CH2O-heterocyclyl; or Ri5 taken together with R13 and R14 form a cycloalkenyl ring, aromatic ring, or heteroaromatic ring; or R1 or Ri5 are each represented independently by formula Ib:

Ib

Ri6 represents independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, aralkylamino, nitro, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -CORi0, -CO2Ri0, -N(Ri0)CO2Ri0, -OC(0)N(Rio)2, -N(Ri0)SO2R10, or -N(RIQ)C(X')N(RIO)2; wherein any two instances of Ri6 may be connected by a covalent bond to form a ring;

Ar2 represents independently for each occurrence a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl with 6-14 ring atoms; or a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl with 5-14 ring atoms, of which one, two or three ring atoms are independently S, O or N;

X1 represents independently for each occurrence a bond, O, S, S(O), S(O)2, S(O)3, amino, alkylamino diradical, alkoxyl diradical, alkyl diradical, alkenyl diradical, alkynyl diradical, amido, carbonyl, -N(Ri0)CO2-, -OC(O)N(R10)-, or -

X2 represents independently for each occurrence H, halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, aralkylamino, nitro, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -CORi0, -CO2R10, -N(R10)CO2R10, - OC(O)N(R1O)2, -N(R10)SO2R10, -N(R10)C(XON(R10)2, or -CH2O-heterocyclyl; and

q represents independently for each occurrence 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;

R2 and R7 are independently H, hydroxyl, alkyl, alkoxyl, amino, alkylamino, or acylamino; or R2 and R7 taken together form a -OC(O)O- linkage, -N(Ri0)C(O)N(Ri0)- linkage, or an optionally substituted covalent linkage comprising 1 to 6 carbon atoms and O, 1, or 2 nitrogen, oxygen, or sulfur atoms to form a 5-8 membered ring; or R7 is a bond to Rs; R3 and R6 each represent independently for each occurrence H, hydroxyl, or alkyl; R4 and R5 each represent independently for each occurrence independently H or alkyl;

R8 is H, a branched or unbranched alkyl or alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, a bond to R7, heterocycloalkyl substituted with an aralkyl group, or has the formula Ic:

Ic

wherein

p is O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and R17 is aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, alkoxyl, heteroaryl, - OR18, -SR18, -N(R1S)2, -N(R10)CO2-alkyl, -CO2R10, -C(O)N(R10)aryl, or a polycyclic ring containing 8-14 carbon atoms; wherein R18 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, acyl, -A!-A2-A3, or CR9=CR9(C(R9)2)nCR9=C(R9)2; or two R18 taken together form a ring;

R9 represents independently for each occurrence H or alkyl;

R10 and R11 represent independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl;

R19 represents independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, or -A1^-A3;

A1 and A3 each represent independently for each occurrence alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl;

A2 represents independently for each occurrence O, N(R10), S, or a bond; and

the stereochemical configuration at any stereocenter of a compound represented by 1 is R, S, or a mixture of these configurations.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein Y is -C(O)-, X is -N(R11)-, R2 and R7 are hydroxyl, R6 is methyl, ethyl, or propyl, and R3, R4, and R5 are H. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein the compound has formula Id:

Id

wherein

R1 a has formula Ie:

Ie

wherein

W is a bond; or bivalent alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl chain;

Z is a bond, -(C(Ri2)2)n-, or -O(C(R12)2)n-;

R13 and R14 are independently H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, or -A1^-A3; or R13 and Ri4 taken together form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring; or Ri3 and Ri4 taken together with Ri5 form a cycloalkenyl ring, aromatic ring, or heteroaromatic ring;

Ri 5 is halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryl, aryloxy, acyloxy, -N(Ri 0)2, acylamino, aralkyl, nitro, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -CORi0, - CO2Ri0, -N(Ri0)CO2Ri0, -OC(O)N(R10)2, -N(Ri0)SO2Ri9, N(Rio)C(0)N(Ri9)2) -N(RiO)(C(R9)2)n-A1-A2-A3, -(C(R9)2)n-halogen, or - CH2O-heterocyclyl; or R15 taken together with Ri3 and R14 form a cycloalkenyl ring, aromatic ring, or heteroaromatic ring; or has the formula If:

If

R16 represents independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocyclo alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, aralkylamino, nitro, ~ acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -COR1O, -CO2R10, - N(R10)CO2R10, -OC(O)N(RiO)2, -N(R10)SO2R10, or -N(R10)C(O)N(R10)2; wherein any two instances Of R16 may be connected by a covalent bond to form a ring;

Ar2 represents independently for each occurrence a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl with 6-14 ring atoms; or a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl with 5-14 ring atoms, of which one, two or three ring atoms are independently S, O or N;

X1 is a bond, O, S, S(O), S(O)2, S(O)3, amino, alkylamino diradical, alkoxyl diradical, alkyl diradical, alkenyl diradical, alkynyl diradical, amido, carbonyl, -N(R10)CO2R10, -OC(O)N(R10)2, or -N(R10)C(O)N(R10)2;

X2 represents independently for each occurrence H, halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, aralkylamino, nitro, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -COR1O, - CO2R10, -N(R10)CO2R10, -OC(O)N(R10)2, -N(R10)SO2Ri0, N(R10)C(O)N(R1O)2, or -CH2O-heterocyclyl; and

q is 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5; and

R8a is H, a branched or unbranched alkyl or alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, a bond to R7, heterocycloalkyl substituted with an aralkyl group, or has the formula Ig:

wherein p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and

R17 is aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, alkoxyl, heteroaryl, - OR18, -SRis, -N(R18)2, -N(R10)CO2-alkyl, -CO2Ri0, -C(O)N(Ri0)aryl, or a polycyclic ring containing 8-14 carbon atoms; wherein Ri8 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, acyl, -A1^-A3, or CR9=CR9(C(R9)2)nCR9=C(R9)2; or two Ri8 taken together form a ring;

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein

Ri3 and Ri4 are independently H, alkyl, or aryl; or Ri3 and Rj4 taken together form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring; or Ri3 and Ri4 taken together with Ri5 form a cycloalkenyl ring or heteroaromatic ring;

Ri5 is halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryl, aryloxy, acyloxy, -N(RiO)2, acylamino, aralkyl, -N(Ri0)SO2Ri9, or -N(R10)C(O)N(R19)2; or Ri5 taken together with Rj3 and Ri4 form a cycloalkenyl ring or heteroaromatic ring; or has the formula If:

\ / ^ \ Ar^-Ar2-^ ^Rie Ri6/n

If

wherein

Ri6 is H; Ar2 represents independently for each occurrence a monocyclic aryl with 6- 14 ring atoms; or a monocyclic heteroaryl with 5-14 ring atoms, of which one, two or three ring atoms are independently S, O or N;

X1 is a bond;

X2 represents independently for each occurrence H, halide, hydroxyl, or alkoxyl; and

q is 1 or 2.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R8 is bicycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl substituted with an aralkyl group, or has the formula Ig:

Ig wherein

p is O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and R17 is aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, alkoxyl, heteroaryl, - ORi8, -SRi8, -N(R18)2, or a polycyclic ring containing 8-14 carbon atoms; wherein R18 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, acyl, or -A1^-A3.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein W is an alkynyl chain and Z is a bond.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R13 and R14 are H and R15 is acylamino.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R13 and R14 taken together form a cyclohexyl ring and R15 is an amino group.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R8a is a bicycloalkyl.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R8a has formula Ig and R17 is N(CH3)Ph.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R1 a is:

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R8a is:

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R8a is ,

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is H O , and R8a is:

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is , and R8a is I

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is H O , and R8a is In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is Ph , In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein Rla is NH2, and R8a is I In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is Ph , and R8a is In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

^ N-Ph "T ^N- compound, wherein R1 a is / , and R8a is I In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is NH25 and R8a is In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is H O , and R8a is In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is Ph , and R8a is In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein Rla is In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is H , and R8a is

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein Ri a is H O , and R8a is

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

U compound, wherein Ri3 is H o , and R8a is ^

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein R1 a is H O , and R8a is

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned

compound, wherein Ri a is H o , and Rga is

Another aspect of the present invention relates to a compound selected from the group consisting of:

41

and

Another aspect of the present invention relates to a compound represented by

formula 2:

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or hydrates thereof,

wherein

Y is -C(R9)2-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, or -C(=NR10)-;

X is O, S, aryl, -N(R11)-, or a bond;

m is O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;

n represents independently for each occurrence O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;

R1 has the formula 2a:

2a

wherein

R12 represents independently for each occurrence H or alkyl; wherein any" two instances OfR12 may be connected by a covalent bond;

Ar1 is a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl with 6-14 ring atoms; or a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl with 5-14 ring atoms, of which one, two or three ring atoms are independently S, O or N;

W is a bond; or bivalent alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl chain;

Z is a bond, -(C(Ri2)2)n-, or -O(C(Ri2)2)n-;

R13 and R14 are independently H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, or -A^A^A3; or R13 and R14 taken together form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring; or R13 and R14 taken together with R15 form a cycloalkenyl ring, or heteroaromatic ring;

R15 is halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryl, aryloxy, acyloxy, -N(R10)2, acylamino, nitro, sulfhydryl, alkylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, thioalkyl, nitrile, -COR10, - CO2R10, -N(R10)CO2R10, -OC(O)N(R1O)2, -N(R10)SO2R19, -N(R10)C(O)N(R19)2, - N(R10)(C(Rg)2)H-A1 -A2- A3, -(C(R9)2)n-halogen, or -CH2O-heterocyclyl; or R15 taken together with R13 and R14 form a cycloalkenyl ring or heteroaromatic ring; or has the formula 2b:

-Aι2-X1-Ar2-(X2)q \Ri6 Ri6, n

2b

wherein

R16 represents independently for each occurrence H or alkyl; Ar2 represents independently for each occurrence a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl with 6-14 ring atoms; or a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl with 5-14 ring atoms, of which one, two or three ring atoms are independently S, O or N;

X1 is a bond or O;

X2 represents independently for each occurrence H, halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, amino, alkylamino, or arylamino; and

q is 1 or 2;

R2 and R7 are independently H, hydroxyl, alkyl, halide, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, silyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, aralklyamino, nitro, sulfhydryl, alkylthio, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, phosphate, silyl, thioalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonyloxy, arylsulfonyloxy, nitrile, -COR, -CO2R, or -CH2O- heterocyclyl; or R2 and R7 taken together form a -OC(O)O- linkage or an optionally substituted alkyl linkage containing 1 to 6 carbon atoms; or R7 is a bond to R8;

R3 and R6 each represent independently for each occurrence H, halide, hydroxyl, amino, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, silyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, or aralklyamino;

R4 and R5 each represent independently for each occurrence H, halide, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, alkoxyl', aryloxy, acyloxy, silyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, or aralklyamino;

Rg is H, a branched or unbranched alkyl or alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, a bond to R7, heterocycloalkyl substituted with an aralkyl group, or has the formula 2c:

2c

wherein

p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and R17 is aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, alkoxyl, heteroaryl, - ORi8, -SRi8, -N(Ri8)2, -N(Ri0)CO2-alkyl, -CO2Ri0, -C(O)N(Ri0)aryl, or a polycyclic ring containing 8-14 carbon atoms; wherein Ri8 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, acyl, -A1^-A3, or CR9=CR9(C(R9)2)nCR9=C(R9)2; or two Ri8 taken together form a ring;

R9 represents independently for each occurrence H or alkyl;

R10 and Rn each represent independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl;

Ri 9 represents independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, 1 0 "X heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, or -A -A -A ;

A1 and A3 each represent independently for each occurrence alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl;

A2 represents independently for each occurrence O or a bond; and

the stereochemical configuration at any stereocenter of a compound represented by 2 is R, S, or a mixture of these configurations.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R2 and R7 are hydroxyl.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R2 and R7 are hydroxyl; and R4, R5, and R6 are H.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R2 and R7 are hydroxyl; R4, R5, and R6 are H; and m and n are 1.

hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R2 and R7 are hydroxyl; R4, R5, R6 are H; m and n are 1; and R3 is methyl.

Another aspect of the present invention relates to a compound represented by formula 3:

3

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or hydrates thereof,

wherein

Y is -C(R9)2-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, or -C(=NR10)-;

X is -N(Rn)-, an optionally substituted phenyl group, or a bond;

m is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;

n represents independently for each occurrence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;

R1 is alkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, has the formula 3a:

3a

wherein

R12 represents independently for each occurrence H or alkyl; wherein any two instances of R12 may be connected by a covalent bond;

Ar is a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl with 6-14 ring atoms; or a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl with 5-14 ring atoms, of which one, two or three ring atoms are independently S, O or N;

W is a bond; or bivalent alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl chain;

Z is a bond, -(C(R12)2)n-, or -O(C(R12)2)n-;

R13 and R14 are independently H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, halide, alkenyl, alkynyl, aminoalkyl, thiol, thioalkyl, silyl, nitro, nitrile, alkoxyl, acyl, acylamino, -COR10, -CO2R1O, or -A^A2- A3; or R13 and R14 taken together form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring; or R13 and Ri4 taken together with R15 form a cycloalkenyl ring, aromatic ring, or heteroaromatic ring;

Ri 5 is halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryl, aryloxy, acyloxy, -N(Ri 0)2, acylamino, aralkyl, nitro, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -CORi0, -CO2R10, - N(Rio)C02Rio, -OC(0)N(Rio)2, -N(Ri0)SO2Ri9, -N(Ri0)C(O)N(Ri9)2, - N(Rio)(C(R9)2)n-A1 -A2-A3, -(C(R9)2)n-halogen, -CH2O-heterocyclyl, alkyl, - - cycloalkyl, alkenyl,- alkynyl,. silyloxy, -thiol, acylthio, -phosphate, silyl, thioalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonyloxy, or arylsulfonyloxy; or Ri5 taken together with Ri3 and Rj4 form a cycloalkenyl ring, aromatic ring, or heteroaromatic ring; or Ri or Rj5 are independently represented by formula 3b:

3b

wherein

Ri6 represents independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, aralkylamino, nitro, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -CORi0, -CO2Ri0, -N(Ri0)CO2Ri0, -OC(O)N(Ri0)2, -N(R10)SO2Ri0, or -N(Rio)C(0)N(Rio)2; wherein any two instances of R16 may be connected by a covalent bond to form a ring;

Ar2 represents independently for each occurrence a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl with 6-14 ring atoms; or a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl with 5-14 ring atoms, of which one, two or three ring atoms are independently S, O or N;

X1 represents independently for each occurrence a bond, O, S, S(O), S(O)2, S(O)3, amino, alkylamino diradical, alkoxyl diradical, alkyl diradical, alkenyl diradical, alkynyl diradical, amido, carbonyl, -N(Ri0)CO2RiO, -OC(O)N(Ri 0)2, or -

X2 represents independently for each occurrence H, halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, aralkylamino, 24 48

nitro, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -COR10, -CO2R10, -N(Ri O)CO2R10, - OC(O)N(R1O)2, -N(R10)SO2R10, -N(R10)C(O)N(R10)2, or -CHzO-heterocyclyl; and

q represents independently for each occurrence 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;

R2 and R7 are independently H, hydroxyl, alkyl, halide, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, silyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, aralkly amino, nitro, sulfhydryl, alkylthio, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, phosphate, silyl, thioalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonyloxy, arylsulfonyloxy, nitrile, -COR, -CO2R, or -CH2O- heterocyclyl; or R2 and R7 taken together form a -OC(O)O- linkage or an optionally substituted alkyl linkage containing 1 to 6 carbon atoms; or R7 is bond to R8;

R3 and R6 each represent independently for each occurrence H, halide, hydroxyl, amino, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, silyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, or aralklyamino;

R4 and R5 each represent independently for each occurrence H, halide, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, silyloxy, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, or aralklyamino;

R8 is a branched or unbranched alkyl, bicycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl substituted with an aralkyl group, or has the formula 3c:

3c

wherein

p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and R17 is aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, heteroaryl, -N(R18)2, - OR18, or -CO2R10; wherein R18 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, -A1^-A3, or -CR9=CR9(C(R9)2)nCR9=C(R9)2; or two R18 taken together form a ring;

R9 represents independently for each occurrence H or alkyl;

R10 and R11 each represent independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl; Ri9 represents independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, or -A1 -A2- A3;

A1 and A3 each represent independently for each occurrence alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl;

A represents independently for each occurrence O or a bond; and

the stereochemical configuration at any stereocenter of a compound represented by 3 is R, S, or a mixture of these configurations.

Another aspect of the present invention relates to compound represented by formula 4:

4

or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or hydrates thereof,

wherein

Y is -C(Rg)2-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, or -C(=NR10)-;

X is O, S, -N(R11)-, aryl, or a bond;

m is O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;

n represents independently for each occurrence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;

R1 is alkyl, aralkyl, heteroaralkyl, has the formula 4a:

4a

wherein T/US2005/021524 50

R12 represents independently for each occurrence H or alkyl; wherein any two instances of R12 may be connected by a covalent bond;

Ar1 is a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl with 6-14 ring atoms; or a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl with 5-14 ring atoms, of which one, two or three ring atoms are independently S, O or N;

W is a bond; or bivalent alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl chain;

Z is a bond, -(C(R12)2)n-, or -O(C(R12)2)n-;

R13 and R14 are independently H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, halide, alkenyl, alkynyl, aminoalkyl, thiol, thioalkyl, silyl, nitro, nitrile, alkoxyl, acyl, acylamino, -COR10, -CO2R10, or -A'-A2- A3; or R13 and R14 taken together form a monocyclic or polycyclic ring; or Rj3 and Ri4 taken together with R15 form a cycloalkenyl ring, aromatic ring, or heteroaromatic ring;

Ri5 is halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryl, aryloxy, acyloxy, -N(R10)2, acylamino, aralkyl, nitro, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -COR10, -CO2R10, - N(R10)CO2R10, -OC(O)N(R1C)2, -N(R10)SO2R19, -N(Ri0)C(O)N(R19)2, - N(Rio)(C(R9)2)n-A1-A2-A3, -(C(R9)2)n-halogen, -CH2O-heterocyclyl, alkyl, cycloalkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, silyloxy, thiol, acylthio, phosphate, silyl, thioalkyl, alkylsulfonyl, arylsulfonyl, alkylsulfonyloxy, or arylsulfonyloxy; or Ri5 taken together with Ri3 and Ri4 form a cycloalkenyl ring, aromatic ring, or heteroaromatic ring; or Ri or Ri5 are represented by formula 4b:

4b

wherein

Ri6 represents independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, aralkyl, halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, aralkylamino, nitro, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -CORi0, -CO2R10, -N(Ri0)CO2Ri0, -OC(O)N(Ri 0)2, -N(R10)SO2Ri0, or -N(R1O)C(O)N(RiO)2; wherein any two instances of Ri6 may be connected by a covalent bond to form a ring;

Ar2 represents independently for each occurrence a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl with 6-14 ring atoms; or a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl with 5-14 ring atoms, of which one, two or three ring atoms are independently S, O or N;

X1 represents independently for each occurrence a bond, O, S, S(O), S(O)2, S(O)3, amino, alkylamino diradical, alkoxyl diradical, alkyl diradical, alkenyl diradical, alkynyl diradical, amido, carbonyl, -N(R10)CO2RiO, -OC(O)N(R1O)2, or - N(R10)C(O)N(RiO)2;

X2 represents independently for each occurrence H, halide, hydroxyl, alkoxyl, aryloxy, acyloxy, amino, alkylamino, arylamino, acylamino, aralkylamino, nitro, acylthio, carboxamide, carboxyl, nitrile, -CORi0, -CO2RiO, -N(Rio)C02Rio, - OC(0)N(Rio)2, -N(R10)SO2Ri0, -N(Ri0)C(O)N(Ri0)2, or -CH2O-heterocyclyl; and

q represents independently for each occurrence 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5;

R2 and R7 are independently hydroxyl or alkoxyl;

R3, R4, and R5 are H;

R6 is methyl, ethyl, or propyl;

R8 is H, a branched or unbranched alkyl or alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, a bond to R7, heterocycloalkyl substituted with an aralkyl group, or has the formula 4c:

4c

wherein

p is 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; and Ri7 is aryl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, heterocyclyl, alkoxyl, heteroaryl, - ORi8, -SRi8, -N(Ri8)2, -N(Rio)C02-alkyl, -CO2Ri0, -C(O)N(Ri0)aryl, or a polycyclic ring containing 8-14 carbon atoms; wherein Ri8 is independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, acyl, -A -A -A , or or two Ri8 taken together form a ring;

R9 represents independently for each occurrence H or alkyl;

R1O and Rn each represent independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl;

Ri 9 represents independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, heteroaryl, heteroaralkyl, or -A1 -A2- A3;

A1 and A3 each represent independently for each occurrence alkyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, aralkyl, or heteroaralkyl;

A2 represents independently for each occurrence O or a bond; and

the stereochemical configuration at any stereocenter of a compound represented by 4 is R, S, or a mixture of these configurations. Another aspect of the present invention relates to a compound represented by formula 5:

5 or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, solvates, or hydrates thereof, wherein: Y is -C(Re)2-, -C(O)-, -C(S)-, or -C(=NR,0)-; X is O, S5 Or -N(Rn)-; m is O, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6; n represents independently for each occurrence 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6;

Ri is alkyl, aralkyl, heteroalkyl, or has the formula 5a or 5b:

5a 5b wherein: Ri2 represents independently for each occurrence H or alkyl; wherein any two instances of Ri2 may be connected by a covalent bond; Ar1 is a monocyclic or bicyclic aryl with 6-14 ring atoms; or a monocyclic or bicyclic heteroaryl with 5-14 ring atoms, of which one, two or three ring atoms are independently S, O or N; or Ar1 is represented by formua 5c:

5c wherein, T independently for each occurrence is H, halide, branched or unbranched alkyl, alkenyl, allyl, alkoxy, aryl, aralkyl, hydroxyl, amino, aminoalkyl, amido, carboxamide, cycloalkyl, cycloalkene, bycycloalkyl, bicycloalkene, cycloalkalkyl, heteroaromatic, heteroaralkyl, heterocyclyl, heterocyclalkyl, haloalkyl, ester; carboxylic, bis aryl, bis aryl ether, heterocyclic substituted aryl, or two T taken together form an aromatic or nonaromatic ring; and p is O, 1, 2, 3, or 4; W is a bond; or bivalent alkyl, aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl group; Z is a bond; H; -SR; -S(O)2R; -NRSO2R; -S(O)R; -N(R)2; -C(O)R; -CO2R; - C(O)N(R)2; -C(S)N(R)2; -CH2C(O)heterocyclyl; -NRC(O)R; -NRCO2R; - OC(O)N(R)2; -NRC(θχC(R9)2)nN(R)2; -NC(O)CH(R)2; -Q=NR)N(R)2; -C(=NR)R; hydroxyalkyl; or mono or bicyclic aryl, heteroaryl, or heterocyclyl; wherein: R independently for each occurrence is H, branched or unbranched alkyl, alkenyl, allyl, alkoxy, haloalkyl, acyl, mesylate, tosylate, ester, - (C(R9)2)nT,-CH((C(R9)2)nT)2, or two R taken together form an aromatic or nonaromatic ring; R2 and R7 are independently H, hydroxyl, alkyl, alkoxyl, amino, alkylamino, ester, or carboxamide; R3 and R6 each represent independently for each occurrence H, hydroxyl, or alkyl; R4 and R5 each represent independently for each occurrence H or alkyl; and Rs is H, a branched or unbranched alkyl or alkenyl, cycloalkyl, heterocycloalkyl, bicycloalkyl, a branched or unbranched aminoalkyl, or heterocycloalkyl substituted with an aralkyl group; Rg, R10, and R11 represents independently for each occurrence H, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, cycloalkyl, cycloalkalkyl, heteroaryl, or heteroaralkyl; providing that Ar1, W and Z may be further substituted with one or more groups selected from the following: halide, amido, alkoxy, ether, -NO2, hydroxyl, -NR2, or -CN; that where applicable Ar1, W, and Z, may be bonded to each other at the ortho, meta, or para positions; and the stereochemical configuration at any stereocenter of a compound represented by 5 is R, S, or a mixture of these configurations. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R2 is OH. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R6 is methyl or ethyl and R7 is hydroxyl. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein Y is -C(O)-, X is -N(R11)-, and R8 is bicycloalkyl. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R1 has formula 5 a. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R1 has formula 5a, wherein R12 is H or methyl. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R1 has formula 5a, wherein Ar1 is a benzene ring. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R1 has formula 5a, wherein W is a bond, -CH2-, or a benzene ring.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R1 has formula 5b, wherein R12 is H or methyl.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R1 has formula 5b, wherein n is 4. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein R1 has formula 5b and Z is N(R)2. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein the compound has formula 5d or 5e:

5d 5e wherein: Ri has formula 5f:

5f wherein: L is N or CR; and W, Z, Ri3, R]4, R]5, and n are as defined above. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is CH, W is a benzene ring, and Z is -C(O)N(R)2. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is CR, R is alkoxy, W is a benzene ring, and Z is -C(O)N(R)2. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is COMe5 W is a benzene ring, and Z is -C(O)N(R)2. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is COEt, W is a benzene ring, and Z is -C(O)N(R)2. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is COCH2(cyclopropyl), W is a benzene ring, and Z is -C(O)N(R)2. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is CH, W is a benzene ring, and Z is H. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is CH, W is -CH2-, and Z is -N(R)2. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is CH, W is a piperazine ring, and Z is -C(S)N(R)2. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is CH, W is a piperazine ring, and Z is -C(O)N(R)2. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is CH, W is a bond, and Z is N(R)2. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is CH, W is a bond, and Z is -NRCO2R or -OC(O)N(R)2. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned compound, wherein L is CH, W is a bond, and Z is -NRC(O)(C(R9)2)nN(R)2. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to a compound or formula 5g:

Another aspect of the present invention relates to a compound selected from the group consisting of:

Another aspect of the present invention relates to a pharmaceutical composition

comprising a compound of formula 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 as described above and at least one

pharmaceutically acceptable excipient.

Methods of the Invention

One aspect of the present invention relates to a method of treating a Bel-mediated

disorder, comprising the step of: administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of formula 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 as described above.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said Bel-mediated disorder is cancer or neoplastic disease. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cancer or neoplastic disease is selected from the group consisting of acute leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemia, myeloblastic, promyelocytic, myelomonocytic, monocytic, erythroleukemia, chronic leukemia, chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, polycythemia Vera, Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's disease; multiple myeloma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia, heavy chain disease, fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, stadenocarcinoma, medullary, carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms1 tumor, cervical cancer, uterine cancer, testicular tumor, lung carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, meningioma, melanoma, neuroblastoma, retinoblastoma, and endometrial cancer. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cancer is follicular lymphoma, diffuse large B-cell lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, chronic lymphocytic leukemia prostrate cancer, breast cancer, neuroblastoma, colorectal, endometrial, ovarian, lung cancer, hepatocellular carcinoma, multiple myeloma, head and neck or testicular cancer. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cancer over-expresses a BcI protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cancer is dependent upon a BcI protein for growth and survival. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said BcI protein is Bcl-2. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said BcI protein is Bcl-xL. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein the cancer exhibits a t(14;18) chromosomal translocation.

hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said compound is administered parenterally.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said compound is administered intramuscularly, intravenously, subcutaneously, orally, pulmonary, intrathecally, topically or intranasally.

hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said compound is administered systemically.

hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said patient is a mammal.

hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said patient is a primate.

hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said patient is a human. In another aspect, the present invention relates to a method of treating a Bel- mediated disorder, comprising the step of: administering to a patient in need thereof a therapeutically effective amount of a chemothereutic agent in combination with a therapeutically effective amount of a compound of compound of formula 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 as described above. hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said Bel-mediated disorder is cancer or neoplastic disease. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cancer or neoplastic disease is selected from the group consisting of acute leukemia, acute lymphocytic leukemia, acute myelocytic leukemia, myeloblastic, promyelocytic, myelomonocytic, monocytic, erythroleukemia, chronic leukemia, chronic myelocytic (granulocytic) leukemia, chronic lymphocytic leukemia, polycythemia Vera, Hodgkin's disease, non-Hodgkin's disease; multiple myeloma, Waldenstrom's macroglobulinemia, heavy chain disease, fibrosarcoma, myxosarcoma, liposarcoma, chondrosarcoma, osteogenic sarcoma, chordoma, angiosarcoma, endotheliosarcoma, lymphangiosarcoma, lymphangioendotheliosarcoma, synovioma, mesothelioma, Ewing's tumor, leiomyosarcoma, rhabdomyosarcoma, colon carcinoma, pancreatic cancer, breast cancer, ovarian cancer, prostate cancer, squamous cell carcinoma, basal cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, sweat gland carcinoma, sebaceous gland carcinoma, papillary carcinoma, papillary adenocarcinomas, stadenocarcinoma, medullary carcinoma, bronchogenic carcinoma, renal cell carcinoma, hepatoma, bile duct carcinoma, choriocarcinoma, seminoma, embryonal carcinoma, Wilms' tumor, cervical cancer, uterine cancer, testicular tumor, lung carcinoma, small cell lung carcinoma, bladder carcinoma, epithelial carcinoma, glioma, astrocytoma, medulloblastoma, craniopharyngioma, ependymoma, pinealoma, hemangioblastoma, acoustic neuroma, oligodendroglioma, meningioma, melanoma, neuroblastoma, retinoblastoma, and endometrial cancer. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein the cancer over-expresses a BcI protein. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cancer is dependent upon a BcI protein for growth and survival. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said BcI protein is Bcl-2. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said BcI protein is Bcl-xL. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein said cancer exhibits at(14;18) chromosomal translocation.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned method, wherein the amount of compound of formula 1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 is such that the cellular levels of BcI client proteins are reduced, and the amount of said chemotherapeutic agent is such that said BcI client proteins are effectively inhibited by said chemotherapeutic agent.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned methods, wherein said compound is administered parenterally. In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned methods, wherein said compound is administered intramuscularly, intravenously, subcutaneously, orally, pulmonary, intrathecally, topically or intranasally.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned methods, wherein said compound is administered systemically.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned methods, wherein said patient is a mammal.

In certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned methods, wherein said patient is a primate.

hi certain embodiments, the present invention relates to the aforementioned methods, wherein said patient is a human.

Pharmaceutical Compositions

hi another aspect, the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the compounds described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents. As described in detail below, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, e.g., those targeted for buccal, sublingual, and systemic absorption, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular, intravenous or epidural injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension, or sustained-release formulation; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment, or a controlled-release patch or spray applied to the skin; (4) intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam; (5) sublingually; (6) ocularly; (7) transdermally; (8) nasally; (9) pulmonary; or (10) intrathecally.

The phrase "therapeutically-effective amount" as used herein means that amount of a compound, material, or composition comprising a compound of the present invention which is effective for producing some desired therapeutic effect in at least a sub-population of cells in an animal at a reasonable benefit/risk ratio applicable to any medical treatment.

The phrase "pharmaceutically acceptable" is employed herein to refer to those compounds, materials, compositions, and/or dosage forms which are, within the scope of sound medical judgment, suitable for use in contact with the tissues of human beings and animals without excessive toxicity, irritation, allergic response, or other problem or - -complication, commensurate with a reasonable benefit/risk ratio.

The phrase "pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier" as used herein means a pharmaceutically-acceptable material, composition or vehicle, such as a liquid or solid filler, diluent, excipient, manufacturing aid (e.g., lubricant, talc magnesium, calcium or zinc stearate, or steric acid), or solvent encapsulating material, involved in carrying or transporting the subject compound from one organ, or portion of the body, to another organ, or portion of the body. Each carrier must be "acceptable" in the sense of being compatible with the other ingredients of the formulation and not injurious to the patient. Some examples of materials which can serve as pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers include: (1) sugars, such as lactose, glucose and sucrose; (2) starches, such as corn starch and potato starch; (3) cellulose, and its derivatives, such as sodium carboxymethyl cellulose, ethyl cellulose and cellulose acetate; (4) powdered tragacanth; (5) malt; (6) gelatin; (7) talc; (8) excipients, such as cocoa butter and suppository waxes; (9) oils, such as peanut oil, cottonseed oil, safflower oil, sesame oil, olive oil, corn oil and soybean oil; (10) glycols, such as propylene glycol; (11) polyols, such as glycerin, sorbitol, mannitol and polyethylene glycol; (12) esters, such as ethyl oleate and ethyl laurate; (13) agar; (14) buffering agents, such as magnesium hydroxide and aluminum hydroxide; (15) alginic acid; (16) pyrogen-free water; (17) isotonic saline; (18) Ringer's solution; (19) ethyl alcohol; (20) pH buffered solutions; (21) polyesters, polycarbonates and/or polyanhydrides; and (22) other non-toxic compatible substances employed in pharmaceutical formulations.

As set out above, certain embodiments of the present compounds may contain a basic functional group, such as amino or alkylamino, and are, thus, capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable acids. The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable salts" in this respect, refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic acid addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can be prepared in situ in the administration vehicle or the dosage form manufacturing process, or by separately reacting a purified compound of the invention in its free base form with a suitable organic or inorganic acid, and isolating the salt thus formed during subsequent purification. Representative salts include the hydrobromide, hydrochloride, sulfate, bisulfate, phosphate, nitrate, acetate, valerate, oleate, palmitate, stearate, laurate, benzoate, lactate, phosphate, tosylate, citrate, maleate, fumarate, succinate, tartrate, napthylate, mesylate, glucoheptonate, lactobionate, and laurylsulphonate salts and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al. (1977) "Pharmaceutical Salts", J. Pharm. ScL 66:1-19).

The pharmaceutically acceptable salts of the subject compounds include the conventional nontoxic salts or quaternary ammonium salts of the compounds, e.g., from non-toxic organic or inorganic acids. For example, such conventional nontoxic salts include those derived from inorganic acids such as hydrochloride, hydrobromic, sulfuric, sulfamic, phosphoric, nitric, and the like; and the salts prepared from organic acids such as acetic, propionic, succinic, glycolic, stearic, lactic, malic, tartaric, citric, ascorbic, palmitic, maleic, hydroxymaleic, phenylacetic, glutamic, benzoic, salicyclic, sulfanilic, 2- acetoxybenzoic, fumaric, toluenesulfonic, methanesulfonic, ethane disulfonic, oxalic, isothionic, and the like.

In other cases, the compounds of the present invention may contain one or more acidic functional groups and, thus, are capable of forming pharmaceutically-acceptable salts with pharmaceutically-acceptable bases. The term "pharmaceutically-acceptable salts" in these instances refers to the relatively non-toxic, inorganic and organic base addition salts of compounds of the present invention. These salts can likewise be prepared in situ in the administration vehicle or the dosage form manufacturing process, or by separately reacting the purified compound in its free acid form with a suitable base, such as the hydroxide, carbonate or bicarbonate of a pharmaceutically-acceptable metal cation, with ammonia, or with a pharmaceutically-acceptable organic primary, secondary or tertiary amine. Representative alkali or alkaline earth salts include the lithium, sodium, potassium, calcium, magnesium, and aluminum salts and the like. Representative organic amines useful for the formation of base addition salts include ethylamine, diethylamine, ethylenediamine, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, piperazine and the like. (See, for example, Berge et al., supra)

Wetting agents, emulsifiers and lubricants, such as sodium lauryl sulfate and magnesium stearate, as well as coloring agents, release agents, coating agents, sweetening, flavoring and perfuming agents, preservatives and antioxidants can also be present in the compositions.

Examples of pharmaceutically- acceptable antioxidants include: (1) water soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbic acid, cysteine hydrochloride, sodium bisulfate, sodium metabisulfite, sodium sulfite and the like; (2) oil-soluble antioxidants, such as ascorbyl palmitate, butylated hydroxyanisole (BHA), butylated hydroxytoluene (BHT), lecithin, propyl gallate, alpha-tocopherol, and the like; and (3) metal chelating agents, such as citric acid, ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid (EDTA), sorbitol, tartaric acid, phosphoric acid, and the like.

Formulations of the present invention include those suitable for oral, nasal, topical (including buccal and sublingual), rectal, vaginal and/or parenteral administration. The formulations may conveniently be presented in unit dosage form and may be prepared by any methods well known in the art of pharmacy. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will vary depending upon the host being treated, the particular mode of administration. The amount of active ingredient which can be combined with a carrier material to produce a single dosage form will generally be that amount of the compound which produces a therapeutic effect. Generally, out of one hundred per cent, this amount will range from about 0.1 per cent to about ninety-nine percent of active ingredient, preferably from about 5 per cent to about 70 per cent, most preferably from about 10 percent to about 30 percent.

In certain embodiments, a formulation of the present invention comprises an excipient selected from the group consisting of cyclodextrins, celluloses, liposomes, micelle forming agents, e.g., bile acids, and polymeric carriers, e.g., polyesters and polyanhydrides; and a compound of the present invention. Li certain embodiments, an aforementioned formulation renders orally bioavailable a compound of the present invention.

Methods of preparing these formulations or compositions include the step of bringing into association a compound of the present invention with the carrier and, optionally, one or more accessory ingredients, hi general, the formulations are prepared by uniformly and intimately bringing into association a compound of the present invention with liquid carriers, or finely divided solid carriers, or both, and then, if necessary, shaping the product. Formulations of the invention suitable for oral administration may be in the form of capsules, cachets, pills, tablets, lozenges (using a flavored basis, usually sucrose and acacia or tragacanth), powders, granules, or as a solution or a suspension in an aqueous or non¬ aqueous liquid, or as an oil-in-water or water-in-oil liquid emulsion, or as an elixir or syrup, or as pastilles (using an inert base, such as gelatin and glycerin, or sucrose and acacia) and/or as mouth washes and the like, each containing a predetermined amount of a compound of the present invention as an active ingredient. A compound of the present invention may also be administered as a bolus, electuary or paste.

In solid dosage forms of the invention for oral administration (capsules, tablets, pills, dragees, powders, granules, trouches and the like), the active ingredient is mixed with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable carriers, such as sodium citrate or dicalcium phosphate, and/or any of the following: (1) fillers or extenders, such as starches, lactose, sucrose, glucose, mannitol, and/or silicic acid; (2) binders, such as, for example, carboxymethylcellulose, alginates, gelatin, polyvinyl pyrrolidone, sucrose and/or acacia; (3) humectants, such as glycerol; (4) disintegrating agents, such as agar-agar, calcium carbonate, potato or tapioca starch, alginic acid, certain silicates, and sodium carbonate; (5) solution retarding agents, such as paraffin; (6) absorption accelerators, such as quaternary ammonium compounds and surfactants, such as poloxamer and sodium lauryl sulfate; (7) wetting agents, such as, for example, cetyl alcohol, glycerol monostearate, and non-ionic surfactants; (8) absorbents, such as kaolin and bentonite clay; (9) lubricants, such as talc, calcium stearate, magnesium stearate, solid polyethylene glycols, sodium lauryl sulfate, zinc stearate, sodium stearate, stearic acid, and mixtures thereof; (10) coloring agents; and (11) controlled release agents such as crospovidone or ethyl cellulose. In the case of capsules, tablets and pills, the pharmaceutical compositions may also comprise buffering agents. Solid compositions of a similar type may also be employed as fillers in soft and hard-shelled gelatin capsules using such excipients as lactose or milk sugars, as well as high molecular weight polyethylene glycols and the like.

A tablet may be made by compression or molding, optionally with one or more accessory ingredients. Compressed tablets may be prepared using binder (for example, gelatin or hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose), lubricant, inert diluent, preservative, disintegrant (for example, sodium starch glycolate or cross-linked sodium carboxymethyl cellulose), surface-active or dispersing agent. Molded tablets may be made by molding in a suitable machine a mixture of the powdered compound moistened with an inert liquid diluent.

The tablets, and other solid dosage forms of the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, such as dragees, capsules, pills and granules, may optionally be scored or prepared with coatings and shells, such as enteric coatings and other coatings well known in the pharmaceutical-formulating art. They may also be formulated so as to provide slow or controlled release of the active ingredient therein using, for example, hydroxypropylmethyl cellulose in varying proportions to provide the desired release profile, other polymer matrices, liposomes and/or microspheres. They may be formulated for rapid release, e.g., freeze-dried. They may be sterilized by, for example, filtration through a bacteria-retaining filter, or by incorporating sterilizing agents in the form of sterile solid compositions which can be dissolved in sterile water, or some other sterile injectable medium immediately before use. These compositions may also optionally contain opacifying agents and may be of a composition that they release the active ingredient(s) only, or preferentially, in a certain portion of the gastrointestinal tract, optionally, in a delayed manner. Examples of embedding compositions which can be used include polymeric substances and waxes. The active ingredient can also be in micro-encapsulated form, if appropriate, with one or more of the above-described excipients.

Liquid dosage forms for oral administration of the compounds of the invention include pharmaceutically acceptable emulsions, microemulsions, solutions, suspensions, syrups and elixirs. In addition to the active ingredient, the liquid dosage forms may contain inert diluents commonly used in the art, such as, for example, water or other solvents, solubilizing agents and emulsifiers, such as ethyl alcohol, isopropyl alcohol, ethyl carbonate, ethyl acetate, benzyl alcohol, benzyl benzoate, propylene glycol, 1,3-butylene glycol, oils (in particular, cottonseed, groundnut, corn, germ, olive, castor and sesame oils), glycerol, tetrahydrofuryl alcohol, polyethylene glycols and fatty acid esters of sorbitan, and mixtures thereof.

Besides inert diluents, the oral compositions can also include adjuvants such as wetting agents, emulsifying and suspending agents, sweetening, flavoring, coloring, perfuming and preservative agents.

Suspensions, in addition to the active compounds, may contain suspending agents as, for example, ethoxylated isostearyl alcohols, polyoxyethylene sorbitol and sorbitan esters, microcrystalline cellulose, aluminum metahydroxide, bentonite, agar-agar and tragacanth, and mixtures thereof.

Formulations of the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention for rectal or vaginal administration may be presented as a suppository, which may be prepared by mixing one or more compounds of the invention with one or more suitable nonirritating excipients or carriers comprising, for example, cocoa butter, polyethylene glycol, a - suppository wax or a salicylate, and which is solid at room temperature, but liquid at body temperature and, therefore, will melt in the rectum or vaginal cavity and release the active compound.

Formulations of the present invention which are suitable for vaginal administration also include pessaries, tampons, creams, gels, pastes, foams or spray formulations containing such carriers as are known in the art to be appropriate.

Dosage forms for the topical or transdermal administration of a compound of this invention include powders, sprays, ointments, pastes, creams, lotions, gels, solutions, patches and inhalants. The active compound may be mixed under sterile conditions with a pharmaceutically-acceptable carrier, and with any preservatives, buffers, or propellants which may be required.

The ointments, pastes, creams and gels may contain, in addition to an active compound of this invention, excipients, such as animal and vegetable fats, oils, waxes, paraffins, starch, tragacanth, cellulose derivatives, polyethylene glycols, silicones, bentonites, silicic acid, talc and zinc oxide, or mixtures thereof.

Powders and sprays can contain, in addition to a compound of this invention, excipients such as lactose, talc, silicic acid, aluminum hydroxide, calcium silicates and polyamide powder, or mixtures of these substances. Sprays can additionally contain customary propellants, such as chlorofluorohydrocarbons and volatile unsubstituted hydrocarbons, such as butane and propane.

Transdermal patches have the added advantage of providing controlled delivery of a compound of the present invention to the body. Such dosage forms can be made by dissolving or dispersing the compound in the proper medium. Absorption enhancers can also be used to increase the flux of the compound across the skin. The rate of such flux can be controlled by either providing a rate controlling membrane or dispersing the compound in a polymer matrix or gel.

Ophthalmic formulations, eye ointments, powders, solutions and the like, are also contemplated as being within the scope of this invention.

Pharmaceutical compositions of this invention suitable for parenteral administration comprise one or more compounds of the invention in combination with one or more pharmaceutically-acceptable sterile isotonic aqueous or nonaqueous solutions, dispersions, suspensions or emulsions, or sterile powders which may be reconstituted into sterile injectable solutions or dispersions just prior to use, which may contain sugars, alcohols, antioxidants, buffers, bacteriostats, solutes which render the formulation isotonic with the blood of the intended recipient or suspending or thickening agents.

Examples of suitable aqueous and nonaqueous carriers which may be employed in the pharmaceutical compositions of the invention include water, ethanol, polyols (such as glycerol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol, and the like), and suitable mixtures thereof, vegetable oils, such as olive oil, and injectable organic esters, such as ethyl oleate. Proper fluidity can be maintained, for example, by the use of coating materials, such as lecithin, by the maintenance of the required particle size in the case of dispersions, and by the use of surfactants.

These compositions may also contain adjuvants such as preservatives, wetting agents, emulsifying agents and dispersing agents. Prevention of the action of microorganisms upon the subject compounds may be ensured by the inclusion of various antibacterial and antifungal agents, for example, paraben, chlorobutanol, phenol sorbic acid, and the like. It may also be desirable to include isotonic agents, such as sugars, sodium chloride, and the like into the compositions. In addition, prolonged absorption of the injectable pharmaceutical form may be brought about by the inclusion of agents which delay absorption such as aluminum monostearate and gelatin.

In some cases, in order to prolong the effect of a drug, it is desirable to slow the absorption of the drug from subcutaneous or intramuscular injection. This may be accomplished by the use of a liquid suspension of crystalline or amorphous material having poor water solubility. The rate of absorption of the drug then depends upon its rate of dissolution which, in turn, may depend upon crystal size and crystalline form. 21524 83

Alternatively, delayed absorption of a parenterally-administered drug form is accomplished by dissolving or suspending the drug in an oil vehicle.

Injectable depot forms are made by forming microencapsule matrices of the subject compounds in biodegradable polymers such as polylactide-polyglycolide. Depending on the ratio of drug to polymer, and the nature of the particular polymer employed, the rate of drug release can be controlled. Examples of other biodegradable polymers include poly(ortho esters) and poly(anhydrides). Depot injectable formulations are also prepared by entrapping the drug in liposomes or microemulsions which are compatible with body tissue.

When the compounds of the present invention are administered as pharmaceuticals, to humans and animals, they can be given per se or as a pharmaceutical composition containing, for example, 0.1 to 99% (more preferably, 10 to 30%) of active ingredient in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.

The preparations of the present invention may be given orally, parenterally, topically, or rectally. They are of course given in forms suitable for each administration route. For example, they are administered in tablets or capsule form, by injection, inhalation, eye lotion, ointment, suppository, etc. administration by injection, infusion or inhalation; topical by lotion or ointment; and rectal by suppositories. Oral administrations are preferred.

The phrases "parenteral administration" and "administered parenterally" as used herein means modes of administration other than enteral and topical administration, usually by injection, and includes, without limitation, intravenous, intramuscular, intraarterial, intrathecal, intracapsular, intraorbital, intracardiac, intradermal, intraperitoneal, transtracheal, subcutaneous, subcuticular, intraarticulare, subcapsular, subarachnoid, intraspinal and intrasternal injection and infusion.

The phrases "systemic administration," "administered systemically," "peripheral administration" and "administered peripherally" as used herein mean the administration of a compound, drug or other material other than directly into the central nervous system, such that it enters the patient's system and, thus, is subject to metabolism and other like processes, for example, subcutaneous administration.

These compounds may be administered to humans and other animals for therapy by any suitable route of administration, including orally, nasally, as by, for example, a spray, rectally, intravaginally, parenterally, intracisternally and topically, as by powders, ointments or drops, including buccally and sublingually.

Regardless of the route of administration selected, the compounds of the present invention, which may be used in a suitable hydrated form, and/or the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention, are formulated into pharmaceutically-acceptable dosage forms by conventional methods known to those of skill in the art.

Actual dosage levels of the active ingredients in the pharmaceutical compositions of this invention may be varied so as to obtain an amount of the active ingredient which is effective to achieve the desired therapeutic response for a particular patient, composition, and mode of administration, without being toxic to the patient.

The selected dosage level will depend upon a variety of factors including the activity of the particular compound of the present invention employed, or the ester, salt or amide thereof, the route of administration, the time of administration, the rate of excretion or metabolism of the particular compound being employed, the rate and extent of absorption, the duration of the treatment, other drugs, compounds and/or materials used in combination with the particular compound employed, the age, sex, weight, condition, general health and prior medical history of the patient being treated, and like factors well known in the medical arts.

A physician or veterinarian having ordinary skill in the art can readily determine and prescribe the effective amount of the pharmaceutical composition required. For example, the physician or veterinarian could start doses of the compounds of the invention employed in the pharmaceutical composition at levels lower than that required in order to achieve the desired therapeutic effect and gradually increase the dosage until the desired effect is achieved.

In general, a suitable daily dose of a compound of the invention will be that amount of the compound which is the lowest dose effective to produce a therapeutic effect. Such an effective dose will generally depend upon the factors described above. Generally, oral, intravenous, intracerebroventricular and subcutaneous doses of the compounds of this invention for a patient, when used for the indicated analgesic effects, will range from about 0.0001 to about 100 mg per kilogram of body weight per day. 2005/021524 85

If desired, the effective daily dose of the active compound may be administered as two, three, four, five, six or more sub-doses administered separately at appropriate intervals throughout the day, optionally, in unit dosage forms. Preferred dosing is one administration per day.

While it is possible for a compound of the present invention to be administered alone, it is preferable to administer the compound as a pharmaceutical formulation (composition).

The compounds according to the invention may be formulated for administration in any convenient way for use in human or veterinary medicine, by analogy with other pharmaceuticals.

hi another aspect, the present invention provides pharmaceutically acceptable compositions which comprise a therapeutically-effective amount of one or more of the subject compounds, as described above, formulated together with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers (additives) and/or diluents. As described in detail below, the pharmaceutical compositions of the present invention may be specially formulated for administration in solid or liquid form, including those adapted for the following: (1) oral administration, for example, drenches (aqueous or non-aqueous solutions or suspensions), tablets, boluses, powders, granules, pastes for application to the tongue; (2) parenteral administration, for example, by subcutaneous, intramuscular or intravenous injection as, for example, a sterile solution or suspension; (3) topical application, for example, as a cream, ointment or spray applied to the skin, lungs, or mucous membranes; or (4) intravaginally or intrarectally, for example, as a pessary, cream or foam; (5) sublingually or buccally; (6) ocularly; (7) transdermally; or (8) nasally.

The term "treatment" is intended to encompass also prophylaxis, therapy and cure.

The patient receiving this treatment is any animal in need, including primates, in particular humans, and other mammals such as equines, cattle, swine and sheep; and poultry and pets in general.

The compound of the invention can be administered as such or in admixtures with pharmaceutically acceptable carriers and can also be administered in conjunction with antimicrobial agents such as penicillins, cephalosporins, aminoglycosides and glycopeptides. Conjunctive therapy, thus includes sequential, simultaneous and separate administration of the active compound in a way that the therapeutical effects of the first administered one is not entirely disappeared when the subsequent is administered.

The addition of the active compound of the invention to animal feed is preferably accomplished by preparing an appropriate feed premix containing the active compound in an effective amount and incorporating the premix into the complete ration.

Alternatively, an intermediate concentrate or feed supplement containing the active ingredient can be blended into the feed. The way in which such feed premixes and complete rations can be prepared and administered are described in reference books (such as "Applied Animal Nutrition", W.H. Freedman and CO., San Francisco, U.S.A., 1969 or "Livestock Feeds and Feeding" O and B books, Corvallis, Ore., U.S.A., 1977).

Micelles

Recently, the pharmaceutical industry introduced microemulsification technology to improve bioavailability of some lipophilic (water insoluble) pharmaceutical agents. Examples include Trimetrine (Dordunoo, S. K., et al, Drug Development and Industrial Pharmacy, 17(12), 1685-1713, 1991 and REV 5901 (Sheen, P. C, et al., J Pharm Sci 80(7), 712-714, 1991). Among other things, microemulsification provides enhanced bioavailability by preferentially directing absorption to the lymphatic system instead of the circulatory system, which thereby bypasses the liver, and prevents destruction of the compounds in the hepatobiliary circulation.

While all suitable amphiphilic carriers are contemplated, the presently preferred carriers are generally those that have Generally-Recognized-as-Safe (GRAS) status, and that can both solubilize the compound of the present invention and microemulsify it at a later stage when the solution comes into a contact with a complex water phase (such as one found in human gastro-intestinal tract). Usually, amphiphilic ingredients that satisfy these requirements have HLB (hydrophilic to lipophilic balance) values of 2-20, and their structures contain straight chain aliphatic radicals in the range of C-6 to C-20. Examples are polyethylene-glycolized fatty glycerides and polyethylene glycols.

Commercially available amphiphilic carriers are particularly contemplated, including Gelucire-series, Labrafil, Labrasol, or Lauroglycol (all manufactured and distributed by Gattefosse Corporation, Saint Priest, France), PEG-mono-oleate, PEG-di- oleate, PEG-mono-laurate and di-laurate, Lecithin, Polysorbate 80, etc (produced and distributed by a number of companies in USA and worldwide).

Polymers

Hydrophilic polymers suitable for use in the present invention are those which are readily water-soluble, can be covalently attached to a vesicle-forming lipid, and which are tolerated in vivo without toxic effects (i.e., are biocompatible). Suitable polymers include polyethylene glycol (PEG), polylactic (also termed" polylactide), polyglycolic acid (also termed polyglycolide), a polylactic-polyglycolic acid copolymer, and polyvinyl alcohol. Preferred polymers are those having a molecular weight of from about 100 or 120 daltons up to about 5,000 or 10,000 daltons, and more preferably from about 300 daltons to about 5,000 daltons. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the polymer is polyethyleneglycol having a molecular weight of from about 100 to about 5,000 daltons, and more preferably having a molecular weight of from about 300 to about 5,000 daltons. In a particularly preferred embodiment, the polymer is polyethyleneglycol of 750 daltons (PEG(750)). Polymers may also be defined by the number of monomers therein; a preferred embodiment of the present invention utilizes polymers of at least about three monomers, such PEG polymers consisting of three monomers (approximately 150 daltons).

Other hydrophilic polymers which may be suitable for use in the present invention include polyvinylpyrrolidone, polymethoxazoline, polyethyloxazoline, polyhydroxypropyl methacrylamide, polymethacrylamide, polydimethylacrylamide, and derivatized celluloses such as hydroxymethylcellulose or hydroxyethylcellulose.

In certain embodiments, a formulation of the present invention comprises a biocompatible polymer selected from the group consisting of polyamides, polycarbonates, polyalkylenes, polymers of acrylic and methacrylic esters, polyvinyl polymers, polyglycolides, polysiloxanes, polyurethanes and co-polymers thereof, celluloses, polypropylene, polyethylenes, polystyrene, polymers of lactic acid and glycolic acid, polyanhydrides, poly(ortho)esters, poly(butic acid), poly(valeric acid), poly(lactide-co- caprolactone), polysaccharides, proteins, polyhyaluronic acids, polycyanoacrylates, and blends, mixtures, or copolymers thereof.

Cyclodextrins 24 88

Cyclodextrins are cyclic oligosaccharides, consisting of 6, 7 or 8 glucose units, designated by the Greek letter .alpha., .beta, or .gamma., respectively. Cyclodextrins with fewer than six glucose units are not known to exist. The glucose units are linked by alpha- 1,4-glucosidic bonds. As a consequence of the chair conformation of the sugar units, all secondary hydroxyl groups (at C-2, C-3) are located on one side of the ring, while all the primary hydroxyl groups at C-6 are situated on the other side. As a result, the external faces are hydrophilic, making the cyclodextrins water-soluble, hi contrast, the cavities of the cyclodextrins are hydrophobic, since they are lined by the hydrogen of atoms C-3 and C-5, and by ether-like oxygens. These matrices allow complexation with a variety of relatively hydrophobic compounds, including, for instance, steroid compounds such as 17.beta.- estradiol (see, e.g., van Uden et al. Plant Cell Tiss. Org. Cult. 38:1-3-113 (1994)). The complexation takes place by Van der Waals interactions and by hydrogen bond formation. For a general review of the chemistry of cyclodextrins, see, Wenz, Agnew. Chem. hit. Ed. Engl., 33:803-822 (1994).

The physico-chemical properties of the cyclodextrin derivatives depend strongly on the kind and the degree of substitution. For example, their solubility in water ranges from insoluble (e.g., triacetyl-beta-cyclodextrin) to 147% soluble (w/v) (G-2-beta-cyclodextrin). In addition, they are soluble in many organic solvents. The properties of the cyclodextrins enable the control over solubility of various formulation components by increasing or decreasing their solubility.

Numerous cyclodextrins and methods for their preparation have been described. For example, Parmeter (I), et al. (U.S. Pat. No. 3,453,259) and Gramera, et al. (U.S. Pat. No. 3,459,731) described electroneutral cyclodextrins. Other derivatives include cyclodextrins with cationic properties [Parmeter (II), U.S. Pat. No. 3,453,257], insoluble crosslinked cyclodextrins (Solms, U.S. Pat. No. 3,420,788), and cyclodextrins with anionic properties [Parmeter (III), U.S. Pat. No. 3,426,011]. Among the cyclodextrin derivatives with anionic properties, carboxylic acids, phosphorous acids, phosphinous acids, phosphonic acids, phosphoric acids, thiophosphonic acids, thiosulphinic acids, and sulfonic acids have been appended to the parent cyclodextrin [see, Parmeter (III), supra]. Furthermore, sulfoalkyl ether cyclodextrin derivatives have been described by Stella, et al. (U.S. Pat. No. 5,134,127).

Liposomes Liposomes consist of at least one lipid bilayer membrane enclosing an aqueous internal compartment. Liposomes may be characterized by membrane type and by size. Small unilamellar vesicles (SUVs) have a single membrane and typically range between 0.02 and 0.05 μm in diameter; large unilamellar vesicles (LUVS) are typically larger than 0.05 μm Oligolamellar large vesicles and multilamellar vesicles have multiple, usually concentric, membrane layers and are typically larger than 0.1 μm. Liposomes with several nonconcentric membranes, i.e., several smaller vesicles contained within a larger vesicle, are termed multivesicular vesicles.

One aspect of the present invention relates to formulations comprising liposomes containing a compound of the present invention, where the liposome membrane is formulated to provide a liposome with increased carrying capacity. Alternatively or in addition, the compound of the present invention may be contained within, or adsorbed onto, the liposome bilayer of the liposome. The compound of the present invention may be aggregated with a lipid surfactant and carried within the liposome's internal space; in these cases, the liposome membrane is formulated to resist the disruptive effects of the active agent-surfactant aggregate.

According to one embodiment of the present invention, the lipid bilayer of a liposome contains lipids derivatized with polyethylene glycol (PEG), such that the PEG chains extend from the inner surface of the lipid bilayer into the interior space encapsulated by the liposome, and extend from the exterior of the lipid bilayer into the surrounding environment.

Active agents contained within liposomes of the present invention are in solubilized form. Aggregates of surfactant and active agent (such as emulsions or micelles containing the active agent of interest) may be entrapped within the interior space of liposomes according to the present invention. A surfactant acts to disperse and solubilize the active agent, and may be selected from any suitable aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or aromatic surfactant, including but not limited to biocompatible lysophosphatidylcholines (LPCs) of varying chain lengths (for example, from about C. sub.14 to about C.sub.20). Polymer- derivatized lipids such as PEG-lipids may also be utilized for micelle formation as they will act to inhibit micelle/membrane fusion, and as the addition of a polymer to surfactant molecules decreases the CMC of the surfactant and aids in micelle formation. Preferred are surfactants with CMCs in the micromolar range; higher CMC surfactants may be utilized to prepare micelles entrapped within liposomes of the present invention, however, micelle surfactant monomers could affect liposome bilayer stability and would be a factor in designing a liposome of a desired stability.

Liposomes according to the present invention may be prepared by any of a variety of techniques that are known in the art. See, e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,235,871; Published PCT applications WO 96/14057; New RRC, Liposomes: A practical approach, IRL Press, Oxford (1990),. pages 33-104; Lasic DD, Liposomes from physics to applications, Elsevier Science Publishers BV, Amsterdam, 1993.

For example, liposomes of the present invention may be prepared by diffusing a lipid derivatized with a hydrophilic polymer into preformed liposomes, such as by exposing preformed liposomes to micelles composed of lipid-grafted polymers, at lipid concentrations corresponding to the final mole percent of derivatized lipid which is desired in the liposome. Liposomes containing a hydrophilic polymer can also be formed by homogenization, lipid-field hydration, or extrusion techniques, as are known in the art.

In one aspect of the present invention, the liposomes are prepared to have substantially homogeneous sizes in a selected size range. One effective sizing method involves extruding an aqueous suspension of the liposomes through a series of polycarbonate membranes having a selected uniform pore size; the pore size of the membrane will correspond roughly with the largest sizes of liposomes produced by extrusion through that membrane. See e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 4,737,323 (Apr. 12, 1988).

Release Modifiers

The release characteristics of a formulation of the present invention depend on the encapsulating material, the concentration of encapsulated drug, and the presence of release modifiers. For example, release can be manipulated to be pH dependent, for example, using a pH sensitive coating that releases only at a low pH, as in the stomach, or a higher pH, as in the intestine. An enteric coating can be used to prevent release from occurring until after passage through the stomach. Multiple coatings or mixtures of cyanamide encapsulated in different materials can be used to obtain an initial release in the stomach, followed by later release in the intestine. Release can also be manipulated by inclusion of salts or pore forming agents, which can increase water uptake or release of drug by diffusion from the capsule. Excipients which modify the solubility of the drug can also be used to control the release rate. Agents which enhance degradation of the matrix or release from the matrix can also be incorporated. They can be added to the drug, added as a separate phase (i.e., as particulates), or can be co-dissolved in the polymer phase depending on the compound. In all cases the amount should be between 0.1 and thirty percent (w/w polymer). Types of degradation enhancers include inorganic salts such as ammonium sulfate and ammonium chloride, organic acids such as citric acid, benzoic acid, and ascorbic acid, inorganic bases such as sodium carbonate, potassium carbonate, calcium carbonate, zinc carbonate, and zinc hydroxide, and organic bases such as protamine sulfate, spermine, choline, ethanolamine, diethanolamine, and triethanolamine and surfactants such as Tween® and Pluronic®. Pore forming agents which add microstructure to the matrices (i.e., water soluble compounds such as inorganic salts and sugars) are added as particulates. The range should be between one and thirty percent (w/w polymer).

Uptake can also be manipulated by altering residence time of the particles in the gut. This can be achieved, for example, by coating the particle with, or selecting as the encapsulating material, a mucosal adhesive polymer. Examples include most polymers with free carboxyl groups, such as chitosan, celluloses, and especially polyacrylates (as used herein, polyacrylates refers to polymers including acrylate groups and modified acrylate groups such as cyanoacrylates and methacrylates).

Exemplification

The invention now being generally described, it will be more readily understood by reference to the following examples, which are included merely for purposes of illustration of certain aspects and embodiments of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the invention.

Example 1

Synthesis of Benzyl Hydroxyamines 1. NH2ORHCI, MeOH/THF/H2O, rt XHO 2. NaCNBH3, pH= 2 - 3

To a solution of 4-iodobenzaldehyde (0.025 mmol) in MeOH/THF (40 mL, 3:1) was added aqueous solution of NH2OH-HCl (10 mL).The pH was adjusted to 9 using of 6 N KOH. The reaction was stirred at rt for 2 h and NaCNBH3 (1.5 g, 0.025 mmol) was added followed by a crystal of methyl orange. The solution was acidified to a pH 2 and the resulting ruby red color was maintained for the duration of the reaction by the addition of 1 N HCl. After 2 h, another portion of NaCNBH3 (1.5 g, 0.025 mmol) was added. The mixture was stirred for 14 h, at which point, 2/3 of solvent was evaporated and the pH was raised to 9-10 by addition of a 6 N KOH aqueous solution. This mixture was extracted with CH2Cl2 (3 x 100 mL). The organic layers were combined, washed with water then brine. The organic layer was dried (MgSO4), filtered and evaporated in vacuo to afford 1 (5.7 g, 91%) an off-white solid.

Example 2

Hydroxyamine 2 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 1 using 3-iodobenzaldehyde in place of 4-iodobenzaldehyde affording a 90% yield of the desired product.

Example 3 ^NHOH

Hydroxyamine 3 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 1 using 2-iodobenzaldehyde in place of 4-iodobenzaldehyde affording a 85% yield of the desired product.

Example 4

Synthesis of Nitrone Acids for use in [3+2] Cycloadditions

(Keirs, D.; Overton, K. Heterocycles 1989, 28, 841-848) To a suspension of _V-(4- iodobenzyl)hydroxylamine (10 g, 42.5 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (200 mL) under nitrogen was added glyoxylic acid monohydrate (4.7 g, 51.1 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred for 24 h at rt. The reaction mixture was washed with water (2 x 200 mL), brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Et2O (50 mL) was added to the yellowish solid and the suspension was titrated and filtered to afford 4 as a cream colored solid. The mother liquor was concentrated in vacuo, and the solid was washed with Et2O and then filtered to afford 4 (11.8 g, 93% yield).

Example 5

^ OH

Nitrone acid 5 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 4 using N-(3-iodobenzyl)hydroxylamine in place of JV-(4-iodobenzyl)hydroxylamine affording a 90% yield of the desired product.

Example 6

Nitrone acid 6 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 4 using iV-(2-iodobenzyl)hydroxylamine in place of iV-(4-iodobenzyl)hydroxylamine affording a 90% yield of the desired product.

Example 7

Synthesis of Nitrone Carboxylic Methyl Esters for use in [3+2] Cycloadditions

To a solution of N-(4-iodobenzyl)hydroxylamine (16 g, 64 mmol) in benzene (320 mL) was added the methyl glyoxylate (6.8 g, 80 mmol). The mixture was heated to 12O0C for 3 h using a Dean Stark trap. The solution was cooled to rt and the solvent was concentrated in vacuo to give 7 (19.1 g, 93%) as a yellow solid.

Example 8 Nitrone methyl ester 8 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 7 using N-(3-iodobenzyl)hydroxylamine in place of N-(4- iodobenzyl)hydroxylamine affording a 85% yield of the desired product.

Example 9

Nitrone methyl ester 9 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 7 using iV-(2-iodobenzyl)hydroxylamine in place of iV-(4-iodobenzyl) hydroxylamine affording a 90% yield of the desired product.

Example 10

Synthesis of Dipolarophiles HQ TBSO^, /~Me 10 Part A PH TBSCl, imidazole PTBS

To a solution of TBSCl (215 g, 1.43 mol) in CH2Cl2 (1.2 L) at O0C was added imidazole (97 g, 1.43 mol). Propargylic alcohol (83 niL, 1.43 mol) was added dropwise and the suspension was allowed to warmed to rt and stirred for 60 min The reaction was quenched by the addition of water (500 mL). The mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was extracted with hexanes (3 x 500 mL). The organic extracts were combined and washed with brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford an oil which was purified by distillation (70 0C /~10 mm Hg) afforded the desired product (179 g, 74%).

Part B OH TBSO^^^ n-BuLi, acetaldehy >_de*. TBS0 ^f^^\λ% To a solution of tert-Butyldimethyl(2-propynyloxy)silane (freshly distilled, 27 g, 0.16 mol) in THF (300 mL) at -78 0C was added H-BuLi (119 mL of 1.6 M in heane, 0.19 mol ). After 15 min acetaldehyde (10 mL, 0.19 mol.) was added. The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min and quenched with an aqueous solution of 5% (m/v) NH4Cl (50 mL) and water (100 mL). A half volume of THF was evaporated in vacuo and the mixture was poured into water (150 mL). This mixture was extracted with hexanes (3 x 200 mL) and Et2O (100 mL). The combined extracts were dried (Mg2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified by distillation (115 0C / 1 mm Hg (bath temp. 155 0C) to afford the product (30 g, 88%).

Part C

TBSC. J^ lvle JBSO

Lipase CA {Candida Antarctica immobilized on macropous acryl resin, Sigma L- 4777 Lot 11K127) (1 g) was added to a mixture of the propargyl alcohol (10 g, 0.47 mol) and vinyl acetate (129 mL, 0.14 mol) in cyclohexane (380 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 48 h, then filtered and the resin was rinsed with EtOAc (50 mL). The filtrate and the rinses were combined and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by column chromatography (hexane/EtOAc, 95:5 to 80:20) to give 5.3 g of the alcohol and 6.5 g of the acetate (93% ee).

Part D

To a stirred solution of the propargyl acetate (60 g, 0.23 mmol) in EtOAc (700 mL) was added quinoline (30 mL) and Lindlar cat. (6 g) and placed under an atomsphere of H2. After 9 hr the reaction mixture was filtered and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The crude was purified by column chromatography (hexane/ EtOAc 95:5) to afford of the desired product (57.5 g, 97%).

Part E AcQ HO TBSO^ ^Me DIBAL-H > TBSQ , To a stirred solution of the allylic acatate (50 g, 0.19 mol) in CH2Cl2 (400 mL) at - 78 0C was added DEBAL-H (426 mL of a 1 M solution in heptane, 0.43 mol). After 15 min the reaction was diluted with Et2O (400 mL) and quenched with brine (150 mL). The reaction mixture was warmed to rt and stirred for an additional 2 h. The reaction mixture was dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude mixture was purified by column chromatography (hexane/EtoAc, 80:20) to afford (41 g) of the desired product.

Example 11

To a stirred solution of the allylic alcohol (40 g, 0.19 mol) in pyridine (400 mL) and CH2Cl2 (100 mL) at 0 0C was added Fmoc-Cl (62 g). The reaction was warmed to rt, stirred for an additional 30 min, and quenched with water (500 mL). The layers were separated and the water phase was extracted with Et2O (2 x 200 mL) and the combined extracts were washed with CuSO4 (aq) water, brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give Fmoc-protected alcohol . The crude material was carried on to the next step without purification.

The crude product (35 g) was placed in a plastic bottle and THF (100 mL) was added followed by a solution of HF-pyridine (HF-Py (7.7 mL)/ pyridine (15.4 mL)/THF (76.9 mL) The reaction mixture was kept at rt for 4 h and and treated with TMSOMe for 60 min and poured into water (500 mL).The layers were separated and the aqueous phase was extracted with Et2O (3 x 200 mL). The organic extracts were collected and washed with aqueous NaHCO3, brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered an d concentrated in vacuo to give the crude allylic alcohol. The crude material was purified by column chromatography to afford 14.4 g of the desired product.

Example 12 HO TBSO~\=/ Me 12

p OTHP

Part A Move ester structure below Part A ■ - -

A solution of bis (2,2,2-trifluoroethyl)phosphonoacetic acid methyl ester (28 g, 0.1 mmol) and 18-crown-6 (132 g, 0.50 mmol) in THF (2 L) was cooled to -78 ° C under nitrogen. To the cooled solution was added a 0.6 M solution of potassium bis(trimethylsilyl) amide in toluene (20 g, 0.1 mmol). (1S)-2-(tetrahydropyranyloxy) propanal (synthesis described in J. Chem. Soc, Perkin. Trans. 1, 1994, 2791) (16 g, 0.1 mmol) was then added and the resulting mixture was stirred for 30 min at -78 °C. Saturated ammonium chloride was then added and the product was extracted with Et2O (3 x 500 mL). The ether extracts were combined, dried over sodium sulfate, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified via silica gel chromatography to yield 13.5 g of the product.

Part B

4(S)-(Tetrahydro-pyran-2-yloxy)-pent-2-enoic acid methyl ester (10 g, 46.7 mmol) was reduced with DIBAL-H according to the procedure described in J. Chem. Soc, Perkin. Trans. 1 1994, 2791 to yield 4(,S)-(Tetrahydro-pyran-2-yloxy)-pent-2-en-l-ol in 88% yield.

Part C °JHP TBSCl, Imidazole OTHP H°-Λ_>Me *■ TBSO-x yMe

To a solution of 4(1S)-(tetrahydro-pyran-2-yloxy)-pent-2-en-l-ol (4.0 g, 22 mmol) in THF (20 mL) was added imidazole (slowly) (3.66 g, 53.5 mmol) followed by TBSCl (1.2 eq., 3.89 g, 25.8 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at ambient temperature for 4 h, quenched with water (20 mL) and extracted with Et2O (3 x 10 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with water (5 x 50 mL), brine (1 x 50 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The oil was purified by column chromatography (2:1 Hexane/EtOAc) to give the desirded TBDMS ether (5.9 g, 92 %) of a colorless oil.

Part D °JHP Et2AlCl TBSO-x y~Mθ - *- TBSO-

The THP protecting group was removed from t-butyl-dimethyl-[4(.S)-(tetrahydro- pyran-2-yloxy)-pent-2-enyloxy]-silane (IjQ g, _33_ rnmol)_. according., to. the procedure described in Tetrahedron Letters 1984, 25, 663 to afford the product in 83% yield.

Example 13 FmocO

13 Part A OH FmocO TBS°-\^Me — FmocCI » ^∞-Λ^MΘ

To a solution of 5-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxy)-pent-3-en-2(JS)-ol (3.95 g, 18.3 mmol) in pyridine (20 mL) was added FmocCI (6.14 g, 23.7 mmol, 1.3 eq.). The reaction mixture was stirred overnight at rt. The reaction mixture was slowly quenched with water (20 mL) and extracted with Et2O (3 x 15 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with water (3 x 50 mL), 5% KH2PO4 (3 x 50 mL), and brine (1 x 50 mL), dried over MgSO4 and filtered. Concentration and column chromatography afforded 6.98 g (87 %) of a pale yellow oil.

Part B

To a solution of carbonic acid 4-(tert-butyl-dimethyl-silanyloxy)-l-methyl-butyl- 2(_S)-enyl ester 9H-fluoren-9-yl methyl ester (700 mg, 1.60 mmol) in Et2O (5 mL) in a plastic Wharton® tube was added slowly in 6 portions HF/pyridine (70% HF in pyridine, 6 mL). The reaction was monitored by TLC. When the reaction was complete the mixture was cooled to 0 0C with an ice bath and then quenched with TMSOMe (10 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 30 min while warming to ambient temperature. The reaction mixture was poured into water (50 mL), the layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with Et2O (3 x 15 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with water (3 x 30 mL), 5% KH2PO4 (3 x 30 mL), brine (1 x 30 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and filtered. Concentration and column chromatography gave 471 mg (91 %) of a clear colorless oil.

Example 14

General Procedures for [3+2] Cycloadditions

Method 1

To a solution of nitronecarboxylic acid 4 (1.4 g, 3.1 mmol) in CH2Cl2 was added allylic alcohol 11 (1.0 g, 3.1 mmol), HATU (2.0 g, 6 mmol) and DMAP (0.56 g, 4.6 mmol). The solution was cooled in an ice-bath and stirred for 1.0 h. Diisopropylethyl amine (0.44 g, 0.6 mL, 4.6 mmol) was added dropwise over 15 min and the reaction was stirred at 0 0C for 1 h. The solution was diluted with CH2Cl2-5% NaHCO3 (300 mL, 1:1) and the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2Cl2 (2 x 125 mL). The combined organic extracts were combined and washed with water (200 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford an residue. The residue was suspended in THF (10 mL), diisopropylethylamine (0.12 g, 0.167 mL, 1 mmol) was added and the solution was heated at reflux for 1 hr, cooled to rt and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was taken up in THF (8 mL), 1.33 g of Amberlyst-15 was added and the mixture was heated at 70 °C for 2 h. Again the solution was cooled, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography to yield the desired product in 59% yield

Method 2

To a solution of nitrone methyl ester 9 (8.1 g, 38 mmol) and secondary alcohol 10 (12 g, 38 mmol) in toluene (40 mL) was added Ti(OCH(CH3)2)4 (16 g, 17 mL, 56 mmol). The suspension was heated in microwave oven to 140 0C for 30 min, and allowed to cool to rt. The solution was diluted with EtOAc (150 niL) and 3-(dimethylamino)-l,2-propanediol (7 g, 7 mL, 58 mmol) and stirred at rt for 8 h. To the solution was added water (100 niL) and the organic phase was separated, the aqueous was washed with EtOAc (3 x 30 mL). The combined organic extracts were washed with water (100 mL), brine (100 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography (Et2O/CH2Cl2, 1 :29) to afford the lactone ( 13.5 g, 71 %).

To a solution of isoxazolidine (13.5 g, 26 mmol) in THF (120 mL) was added 6 N HCl (67 mL). The solution was stirred at rt for 1.5 h, diluted water (25 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 80 mL), the organic extracts were combined and washed with saturated NaHCO3 (50 mL), brine (50 mL), dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by chromatography on silica a gel (mesh 230-400) (Et2O-CH2Cl2, a gradient of 1 :4 to 1 :2) to give desired product (9.5 g, 64% overall yield for 2 steps) .

Rewrite these two procedures get help from Porter and Georges and Hopkins

Example 15

Synthesis of Isoxazolidine Cores

14

Isoxazolidine 14 was synthesized according to general method 2 using nitrone methyl ester 9 in place of nitrone methyl ester 7 and allylic alcohol 12 in place of allylic alcohol 10. Yield: 40-60%. 15

Isoxazolidine 15 was synthesized according to general method 2 using nitrone methyl ester 8 in place of nitrone methyl ester 7 and allylic alcohol 12 in place of allylic alcohol 10. Yield: 40-60%.

Isoxazolidine 16 was synthesized according to general method 2 using nitrone methyl ester 7 and allylic alcohol 12 in place of allylic alcohol 10. Yield: 40-60%.

Example 18

17

Isoxazolidine 17 was synthesized according to general method 2 using nitrone methyl ester 9 in place of nitrone methyl ester 7 and allylic alcohol 10. Yield: 40-60%.

Example 19

18

Isoxazolidine 18 was synthesized according to general method 2 using nitrone methyl ester 8 in place of nitrone methyl ester 7 allylic alcohol 10. Yield: 40-60%. Example 20

19 Isoxazolidine 19 was synthesized according to general method 2 using nitrone methyl ester 7 and allylic alcohol 10. Yield: 40-60%. " Example 21

20 Isoxazolidine 20 was synthesized according to general method 1 using nitrone acid 6 in place of nitrone acid 4 and allylic alcohol 11. Yield: 50-60%. Example 22

21 Isoxazolidine 21 was synthesized according to general method 1 using nitrone acid 5 in place of nitrone acid 4 and allylic alcohol 11. Yield: 50-60%. Example 23

22 Isoxazolidine 22 was synthesized according to general method 1 using nitrone acid and allylic alcohol 12. Yield: 50-60%.

Example 24

23

Isoxazolidine 23 was synthesized according to general method 1 using nitrone acid in place of nitrone acid 4 and allylic alcohol 13 in place of allylic alcohol 11. Yield: 50- %.

Example 25

24

Isoxazolidine 24 was synthesized according to general method 1 using nitrone acid in place of nitrone acid 4 and allylic alcohol 13 in place of allylic alcohol 11. Yield: 50- %.

Example 26

25

Isoxazolidine 25 was synthesized according to general method 1 using nitrone acid and allylic alcohol 13 in place of allylic alcohol 11. Yield: 50-60%.

Example 27 Synthesis of the AHyI Silane Linker

26

The allyl silane 26 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Tallarico et al., J. Chem. Comb. 2001, 3, 312-318.

Example 28

Modification of Mimotopes Lanterns with SiIyI Linker

32,000 lanterns (2.22 mol of Ph rings, SynPhase-PS L-Series lanterns; Mimotopes, Clayton Victoria Australia) were added to a 22 L reactor flask containing a 5 -neck detachable head and a Teflon®-screw bottom port. The head was connected to an air-driven overhead stirrer bearing a 16 cm- wide Teflon® paddle, an argon inlet, an addition funnel (250 mL), a temperature probe and an outlet for an HBr trap (1 L flask filled with 500 mL water). The reactor was flushed with argon for 15 min followed by the addition of anhydrous DCM (14.8 L). After 10 min, thallium acetate (76 g, 0.20 mol, 0.090 eq) was added. The reaction vessel was covered in aluminum foil and allowed to stir at ambient temperature for 150 min Bromine (177 g, 1.11 mol, 0.50 eq) in DCM (100 mL) was placed in the addition funnel and was added dropwise over the course of 15 min to the reactor, which warmed the reaction temperature from 19.3 to 27.0 0C. Following bromine addition, the reaction was stirred for an additional 60 min The reaction was then quenched with MeOH (1.5 L) and was allowed to stir at ambient temperature overnight. The reaction solution was drained to waste and the lanterns were washed according to the following protocol: (12 L each for 10-20 min) DCM, 3:1 THF:IPA, 3:1 THF:water, water, and THF (2 x). The lanterns were stripped of solvent under reduced pressure. Bromine elemental analysis of five lanterns indicated an average bromine loading level of 34.2 + 0.7 umol/lantern where 35.0 was the target (98% Br incorporation).

26 THF, reflux 27

A 22 L reactor flask containing a Teflon®-screw bottom port with a detachable 5- neck head was connected to a solvent or argon inlet, an air-driven (sparkproof) overhead stirrer bearing a 16 cm-wide Teflon® paddle, a temperature probe, and two condensers. The reactor flask was placed in a 3 -legged heating mantle stand and secured to the wall of a walk-in hood. Anhydrous THF (500 mL, 40 ppm H2O by KF test) was added to the flask and the solvent was stirred vigorously to rinse the flask walls in order to remove water. The solvent was drained out to waste through the bottom port under a flow of argon. The flask was flushed with argon for 10 min and then was charged with di-isopropyl(4- methoxyphenyl)allylsilane (353 g, 1.34 mol, 1.2 eq., Maybridge # MO01086ZZ). Anhydrous THF was added (11 L). Argon was bubbled vigorously through the solution for 20 min using l/8"-wide Teflon® hose. Then, 9-BBN (167 g, 1.34 mol., 1.2 eq.) was added and the solution was stirred at ambient temperature under argon for 2 h. An in-process- check (NMR, CDC13) revealed complete consumption of the allylsilane. The brominated lanterns (32,000, 1.11 mol Br, 1.0 eq.), Pd(PPh3)4 (65 g, 0.056 mol, 0.05 eq., Strem Chemical # 40-2150) and 2 N NaOH (1.34 L, 2.69 mol, 2.4 eq.) were added under a stream of argon. The reaction mixture was heated to an internal temperature of 65 0C under a positive flow of argon with stirring for 40 h. The reaction was cooled, drained and washed with the following solvents in this order (10 L, 10-20 min each): THF5 3:1 THF:IPA, 3:1 THF: 1 N NaCN (aqueous) (1 h or until all black color on lanterns is gone), water (2 x), 3:1 THF:water, THF (2 x) and DCM. The lanterns were stripped of solvent under reduced pressure. Silicon elemental analysis of five lanterns indicated an average silicon loading level of 22.2 + 2.2 umol/lantern. Bromine analysis indicated 5.5 umol/lantern of residual bromine.

Example 29

Loading and Modification of the Isoxazolidine Cores 28

Part A

1808 lanterns were placed in a flame dried 2 L flask. A stir bar was added and the flask was purged with nitrogen and capped with a rubber septa. CH2Cl2 (1.2 L) was added to the flask and the lanterns were allowed to sit in this solution for 10 min when the solvent was removed. A 3% triflic acid solution in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (1.2 L, 393 mmol, 3%, v/v) was added and the lanterns were stirred gently for 20 min The triflic acid solution was then removed via canula. CH2Cl2 (1.2 L) and 2,6-lutidine (62 mL, 532 mmol) were added. The lanterns were stirred in this solution for 10 min Dry isoxazolidine 15 (10 g, 38 mmol) was then added. The resulting mixture was stirred for 18 h, at which point the solution was decanted and the lanterns were washed according to the following protocol: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (1.5 L), THF (1.5 L), THF:IPA (3:1, 1.5 L), THF: water (3:1, 1.5 L), THF:IPA (3:1, 1.5 L), and THF (1.5 L). The lanterns were then dried under reduced pressure overnight. Loading level determination: 5 lanterns were each placed into 5 mL polypropylene containers. To each container was added THF (300 μL) and HF-pyridine (50 μL). The lanterns were allowed to sit in this solution for 6 h, at which point TMSOMe (500 μL)was added and the lanterns were allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a tared glass round-bottomed flask and concentrated in vacuo to afford isoxazolidine 15. The isolated material was weighed and the average loading level was calculated to be 14 μmol/lantern.

Part B

376 lanterns loaded with the isoxazolidine core were placed in a 500 mL flask. The flask was flushed with nitrogen and capped. Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 (7.92 g, 11.3 mmoϊ) and CuI (3.22 g, 16.9 mmol) were added to the flask. The reaction vessel was flushed with nitrogen again, capped, and anhydrous DMF (300 mL) was added. Diisopropylethylamine (30.0 mL, 172 mmol,) was added, followed by 1 -ethynyl-cyclohexylamine (110 mmol) via syringe. The reaction vessel was then shaken gently for 2 h. The solution was then decanted and the lanterns were washed according to the following protocol: (2 x 10 min) DMF (300 mL), THF (300 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 300 mL), THF: Water (3:1, 300 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 300 mL), THF (300 mL), CH2Cl2 (300 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container and treated with THF (300 μL) and HF- pyridine (50 μL). The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 6 h. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL)was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a glass round-bottomed flask and in vacuo to afford the sonogashira product.

Part C

374 lanterns were placed into a 500 mL round-bottomed flask followed by 2- hydroxypyridine (300 mL of a 0.35 M solution in THF, 105 mmol) was flushed with N2 and capped with a rubber septum. V-methyl-iV'-phenyl-propane- 1,3 -diamine (279 mmol) was added and the reaction was heated to 50 0C for 16 h. The solvent was removed and the lanterns were washed according to the following protocol: (2 x 10 min) THF (300 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 300 mL), THF: water (3:1, 300 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 300 mL), THF (300 mL), CH2Cl2 (300 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container and treated with THF (160 μL), pyridine (200 μL) and HF- pyridine (40 μL) . The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 1 h, at which point TMSOMe (500 μL)was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a glass round-bottomed flask and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the product.

Isoxazolidine 28 was characterized by LC-MS analysis. The general procedures and conditions used for analytical analysis used in this and other examples are presented below.

Conditions for LC-MS Analysis

Mass Spectrometer: Waters ZQ

HPLC: Waters 2795 Alliance HT

Diode Array: Waters 2696

Mass spectrometer conditions:

Mass spectrometer ionization mode: electro-spray with positive negative switching.

Mass Range 150 - 1000 Daltons

Capillary (KV) 3.2

Cone (V) 35

Extractor (V) 3

RF Lens 0

Source Temperature 120 0C

Desolvation Temp. 35O 0C

Cone Gas 25 L/H

Desolvation Gas 550 L/H HPLC conditions: Mobile phases: A: Water 95% Acetonitrile 5% Formic Acid 0.1% B: Water 5% Acetonitrile 95% Formic Acid 0.1% Flow rate: 1.00 mL/minute Column: Waters Symmetry 4.6 mm by 50 mm 5 micron C18 Column Temperature 50 0C Gradient: A B Time Flow 85 15 0.0 1.0 85 15 1.0 1.0 0 100 5.0 1.0 0 100 6.0 1.0 85 15 6.1 1.5 85 15 7.0 1.5 85 15 8.0 1.0

Injection volume: 5 μL Diode Array conditions: Wavelength array: 220 nm - 400 nm Resolution: 1.2 nm Sample concentrations are normally run at 0.2 mg/mL unless otherwise stated. Conditions for MS-TOF Analysis Mass Spectrometer: Micromass LCT HPLC: Waters 2795 Alliance HT Diode Array: Waters 2696 Mass spectrometer conditions: Mass spectrometer, ionization mode: electro-spray positive Mass Range 150 - 1000 Daltons Capillary (KV) 3.2 Cone (V) 35 Extractor (V) 3 RF Lens 0 -- ■ - - -- Source Temperature 120 0C Desolvation Temp. 350 0C Cone Gas 25 L/H Desolvation Gas 450 L/H HPLC conditions: Mobile phases: A: Water with Formic Acid 0.1% B: 65% Methanol/35% 2-Propanol with Fc Flow rate: l.OO mL/minute Column: Varian Polaris 2.1 nim by 50 mm 5 micror Column Temperature 5O 0C Gradient: A B Time Flow 90 10 0.0 1.0 90 10 0.5 1.0 10 90 3.2 1.0 10 90 3.4 1.0 0 100 3.5 1.0 0 100 4.0 1.0

Injector system runs in two column regeneration mode so that column equilibration occurs during the rime of the next sample analyzed. Injection volume: 5 μL

Diode Array conditions: Wavelength array: 220 nm - 400 nm

Resolution: 1.2 nm

Sample concentrations are normally run at 2.0 mg/mL unless otherwise stated.

Example 30

29 Compound 29 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, l-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-prop-2-yn-l-ol in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and N^methyl-V-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 576.4 (M+H)+.

Example 31

30 Compound 30 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, l-(4-fluoro-phenyl)-prop-2-yn-l-ol in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and (+)-isopinocampheylamine in place of V-methyl- y-phenyl-propane-U-diamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 538.3 (M+H)+. Example 32

31

Compound 31 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 15, (l,l-dimethyl-prop-2-ynyl)-benzene in place of 1-ethynyl- cyclohexylamine and Λ^-methyl-Λ^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 570.4 (M+H)+.

Example 33

32

Compound 32 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 15, 2-ethynyl-pyridine in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylarnine and (+)- isopinocampheylamine in place of N1 -methyl-N^phenyl-propane- 1,3 -diamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 518.4 (M+H)+.

Example 34

33 Compound 33 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, l-(2-chloro-phenyl)-prop-2-yn-l-ol in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and ^-methyl-N^phenyl-propane-l^-diamine.

Example 35

34

Compound 34 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 15, 17 a-ethynylestradiol in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and Λ^-methyl-Λ^-phenyl-propane-U-diamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 722.4 (M+H)+.

Example 36

35

Compound 35 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 15, 2-phenyl-but-3-yn-2-ol in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and (+)-isopinocampheylamine in place of N1 -methyl-Λ^-phenyl-propane- 1,3 -diamine.

Example 37

36

Compound 36 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, l-furan-3-yl-ρrop-2-yn-l-ol in place of l-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and V-methyl-N^phenyl-propane-ljS-diamine.

Example 38

37

Compound 37 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, 2-phenyl-but-3-yn-2-ol in place of 1- ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and cyclohexyl-methylamine in place of Λ^-methyl-Λ^-phenyl- propane-l,3-diamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 521.6 (M+H)+.

Example 39

Compound 38 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 16 in place of isoxazolidine 15, benzyl-methyl-prop-2-ynyl-amine in place of 1 -ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and 2-cyclohex-l-enyl-ethylamine in place of N1- methyl-A^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine.

Example 40

39

Compound 39 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, l-phenyl-but-3-yn-2-ol in place of 1- ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and N1 -methyl-TV1 -phenyl-propane- 1 ,3 -diamine.

Example 41

40

Compound 40 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, 1-ethynyl-cyclopentanol in place of 1- ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and cyclohexyl-methylamine in place of Λ^-methyl-N1 -phenyl- propane- 1 ,3 -diamine.

Example 42

41

Compound 41 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 15, oct-l-yn-3-ol in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and 3-methyl- butylamine in place of V-methyl-^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine.

42

Compound 42 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, l-(4-imidazol-l-yl-phenyl)-prop-2-yn- l-ol in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and V-methyl-A^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e 624.4 (M+H)+.

Example 44

43

Compound 43 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 15, 2-phenyl-but-3-yn-2-ol in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and (H-)-isopinocampheylamine in place of ^-methyl-iV'-phenyl-propane-ljS-diamine. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e 561.3 (MH-H)+. Example 45

44

Compound 44 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, 5-chloro-pent-l-yne in place of 1- ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and V-methyl-N'-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine.

Example 46

45

Compound 45 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, 2-phenyl-but-3-yn-2-ol in place of 1- ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and geranylamine in place of JV1-methyl-iV1-phenyl-propane-l,3- diamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 561.7 (M+H)+.

Example 47

46

Compound 46 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 15, oct-l-yn-3-ol in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and N - methyl-Λ^-phenyl-propane-l.S-diamine.

Example 48

Compound 47 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 15, 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and valine methyl ester in place of N - methyl-^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine.

Example 49

48

Compound 48 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, l-phenyl-prop-2-yn-l-ol in place of 1- ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and ^-methyl-^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e 558.2 (M+H)+.

Example 50

49

Compound 49 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, 2-phenyl-but-3-yn-2-ol in place of 1- ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and V-methyl-V-phenyl-propane-ljS-diamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 572.3 (M+H)+.

Example 51

50

Compound 50 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 isoxazolidine 15, methyl-prop-2-ynyl-amine in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and (+)-isopinocampheylamine in place of ^-methyl-Λ^-phenyl-propane-ljS-diamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 484.2 (M+H)+.

Example 52

51

Compound 51 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 using isoxazolidine 18 in place of isoxazolidine 15, benzyl-methyl-prop-2-ynyl-amine in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and V-methyl-Λ^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 585.3 (M+H)+.

52

Compound 52 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 29 isoxazolidine 15, l-phenyl-prop-2-yn-l-ol in place of 1-ethynyl-cyclohexylamine and (+)- isopinocampheylamine in place ofV-methyl-iV^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 547.3 (M+H)+.

Example 54

53

Part A

CuI,

18 54

To a solution of isoxazolidine 18 (0.1 g, 0.26 mmol) were added iV-Boc-propargyl amine (0.08 g, 0.51 mmol) in DMF (3 mL),Pd(PPh3)2Cl2) (54 mg, 0.3 mmol), and CuI (20 mg, 0.1 mmol), diisopropylethylamine (0.14 mL, 0.77 mmol). This reaction mixture was maintained at rt for 12 h. It was then partitioned between EtO Ac-Sat aqueous NH4Cl (60 mL, 1:1). The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2 x 30 mL) and all organic fractions were combined and washed with sat aqueous NH4Cl (2 x 50 mL). The organic layer was dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. Purification of the crude material by silica gel chromatography (Hexane-EtOAc, 1:1) gave the desired product. Yield 90%.

Part B

54 53 To a solution of the Boc-protected propargylamine 54 in EtOAc (6 mL) was added HCl (0.12 mL,of a 4 M solution in 1,4-dioxane, 0.24 umol) at 0 0C. The solution was stirred at rt for 30 min when a precipitate formed, the resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h (TLC indicated existence of SM). Additional HCl (120 mL) was added; reaction was maitained at rt for 24 h. TLC showed reaction was not completed; it was then concentrated to dryness; residue was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (6 mL), cooled to 0 0C and TFA (1 mL) was added dropwise. The solution was stirred at rt for 10 min and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was combined with Fmoc-succinamide (0.13 g, 0.39 mmol), 1:1 CH2Cl2- water (3 mL) and NaHCθ3 (220 mg, 2.60 mmol). This mixture was stirred vigorously at rt for 14 h. The organic phase was separated and the aqueous phase extracted with CH2Q2, the organic extracts were combined, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by column chromatography (silica gel, gradient EtOAc-hexane 1 : 1 to 5:1) to afford the desired product (89 mg, 60%).

Example 55

55 Part A

1808 lanterns were placed in a flame dried 2 L flask. A stir bar was added and the flask was purged with nitrogen and capped with a rubber septa. Anhydrous CH2Cl2 (1.2 L) was added to the flask and the lanterns were allowed to sit in this solution for 10 min and then the solvent was removed. A 3% triflic acid solution in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (1.2 L, 393 mmol, 3% v/v) was added and the lanterns were stirred gently for 20 min The triflic acid solution was then removed via canula. Anhydrous CH2Cl2 (1.2 L) and 2,6-lutidine (62 mL, 532 mmol) were added. The lanterns were stirred in this solution for 10 min isoxazolidine 53 (1O g, 38 mmol) was then added. The resulting mixture was stirred for 18 h, at which point the reaction solution was decanted and the lanterns were washed according to the following protocol: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (1.5 L), THF (1.5 L), THF:IPA (3:1, 1.5 L), THF: water (3:1, 1.5 L), THF:IPA (3:1, 1.5 L), and THF (1.5 L). The lanterns were dried in vacuo overnight. Loading level determination: 5 lanterns were each placed into 5 mL polypropylene containers. To each container was added THF (300 μL) and HF-pyridine (50 μL). The lanterns were allowed to sit in this solution for 6 h. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL)was added and the lanterns were allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a tared glass round-bottomed flask and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford isoxazolidine 53. This material was weighed and the average loading level was calculated to 10 μmol/lantern.

Part B

Piperdine DMF 9 lanterns (0.09 mmol, 1 eq) were suspended in a 20% solution of piperdine in DMF (9 mL). The reaction mixture was shaken for 1 h at which point the reaction solution was draine 20% piperdine in DMF (9 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was shaken for 1 h. The lanterns were then removed and washed according to the following protocol: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (9 mL), THF (9 mL), THF:EPA (3:1, 9 mL), THF: water (3:1, 9 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 9 mL), and THF (9 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container and treated with THF (300 μL) and HF- pyridine (50 μL). The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 6 h. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL)was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a glass round-bottomed flask and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the free amine.

Part C

benzoic acid, HATU,pyridine

1 lantern (0.01 mmol, 1 eq) was placed in a solution of DMF/THF (1:1, 0.8 mL). Benzoic acid (0.02 g, 0.20 mmol, 20 eq) was then added, followed by HATU (0.02 g, 0.1 mmol, 10 eq), and pyridine (0.014 g, 0.10 mmol, 10 eq). The reaction mixture was then shaken for 17 h under a nitrogen atmosphere at which point the lantern was removed and washed according to the following procedure: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (1 mL), THF (1 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 1 mL), THF: water (3:1, 1 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 1 mL), and THF (1 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container and treated with THF (300 μL) and HF-pyridine (50 μL). The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 6 h. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL) was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a glass round-bottomed flaskand concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the desired product.

Part D 52 lanterns (0.52 mmol, 1 eq) were placed in a sealed flask and flushed with nitrogen. To the flask was added 2-hydroxypyridine (30 niL of a 0.35 M solution in TEDF; 20 eq) and 3-benzoimidazol-l-yl-propylamine (6.38 g, 36.4 mmol, 70 eq). The reaction mixture was shaken for 27 h at 50 0C under an atmosphere of nitrogen, at which point a lantern was removed and washed according to the following procedure: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (57 mL), THF (57 niL), THF:IPA (3:1, 57 mL), THF: water (3:1, 57 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 57 mL), and THF (57 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container, and treated with THF (300 μL) and HF-pyridine (50 μL). The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 6 hs. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL) was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a glass round-bottomed flask and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the desired product.

Example 56

56

Compound 56 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 55 using N1 -methyl-V-phenyl-propane- 1,3 -diamine in place of 3-benzoimidazol-l-yl- propylamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 585.4 (M+H)+.

Example 57 57

Compound 57 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 55 using isoxazolidine core 15 in place of isoxazolidine core 18 and (+)-isopinocampheylamine in place of 3-benzoimidazol-l-yl-propylamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 574.4 (M+H)+.

Example 58

58

Compound 58 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 55 using l-benzyl-pyrrolidin-3-ylamine in place of 3-benzoimidazol-l-yl-propylamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 597.4 (M+H)+.

Example 59

59

Compound 59 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 55 using isoxazolidine core 15 in place of isoxazolidine core 18 and 3-indol-l-yl-propylamine in place of 3-benzoimidazol-l-yl-propylamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 574.4 (M+H)+.

Example 60 60

Compound 60 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 55 using 4-phenylbenzyl amine in place of 3-benzoimidazol-l-yl-propylamine.

Example 61

61

Compound 61 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 55 using N1 -Benzyl-ethane- 1,2-diamine in place of 3-benzoimidazol-l-yl-propylamine.

62

Compound 62 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 55 using N1-(4-chloro-phenyl)-N1-methyl-propane-l,3-diamine in place of 3-benzoimidazol-l- yl-propylamine. Example 63

Compound 63 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 55 using 4-phenoxybenzylamine in place of 3-benzoimidazol-l-yl-propylamine.

Example 64

64

Compound 64 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 55 using 4-phenyl-butylamine in place of 3-benzoimidazol-l-yl-propylamine.

65

Compound 65 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 55 using isoxazolidine core 15 in place of isoxazolidine core 18, (+)-isopmocampheylamme in place of 3-benzoimidazol-l-yl-propylamine, and 4 hydroxybenzoic acid in place of benzoic acid. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 590.5 (M+H)+.

Example 66

66

Part A

1808 lanterns were placed in a flame dried 2 L flask. A stir bar was added and the flask was purged with nitrogen and capped with a rubber septa. CH2Cl2 (1.2 L) was added to the flask and the lanterns were allowed to sit in this solution for 10 min, when the solvent was removed. A triflic acid solution in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (1.2 L, 393 mmol, 3% v/v) was added and the lanterns were stirred gently for 20 min The triflic acid solution was then removed via cannula. Anhydrous CH2Cl2 (1.2 L) and 2,6-lutidine were added (62 mL, 532 mmol). The lanterns were stirred in this solution for 10 min Isoxazolidine 67 (made according to the procedure described in example 54) (10 g, 38 mmol) was then added. The resulting mixture was stirred for 18 h. At which point the reaction solution was decanted and the lanterns were washed according to the following protocol: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (1.5 L), THF (1.5 L), THF:IPA (3:1, 1.5 L), THF: water (3:1, 1.5 L), THF:IPA (3:1, 1.5 L), and THF (1.5 L). The lanterns were then dried under reduced pressure. Loading level determination: 5 lanterns were each placed into 5 mL polypropylene containers. To each container was added THF (300 μL) and HF-pyridine (50 μL). The lanterns were allowed to sit in this solution for 6 h. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL) was added and the lanterns were allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a tared flask and concentrated in vacuo to afford isoxazolidine 67. This material was massed and the average loading level was calculated to 10 μmol/lantern.

Part B

Fix as in above examples 9 lanterns (0.09 mmol, 1 eq) were suspended in a 20% solution of piperdine in DMF (9 mL). The reaction mixture was shaken for 1 h at which point the reaction solution was drained and additional piperdine in DMF (20% v/v, 9 mL) was added. The reaction mixture was shaken for 1 h. The lanterns were then removed and washed according to the following protocol: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (9 mL), THF (9 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 9 mL), THF: water (3:1, 9 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 9 mL), and THF (9 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container and treated with THF (300 μL) and HF-pyridine (50 μL). The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 6 h. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL)was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a glass round-bottomed flask and concentrated in vacuo to afford the free amine.

Part C

acetic0 acid

Fix as in examples above4 lanterns (0.04 mmol, 1 eq) were placed in a glass vial. Pyridine-2-carboxaldehyde (0.08 g, 0.8 mmol, 20 eq) was added, followed by trimethylorthoformate (4 mL). The lanterns were allowed to sit in this solution for 45 min with gentle shaking. NaBH3CN (0.13 g, 2.1 mmol, 30 eq), acetic acid (one drop) and MeOH (one drop) were added and the reaction mixture was shaken under a nitrogen atmosphere for 36 h. The lanterns were then removed and washed according to the following protocol: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (4 mL), THF (4 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 4 mL), THF: water (3:1, 4 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 4 mL), and THF (4 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container and treated with THF (300 μL) and HF-pyridine,(50 μL). The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 6 hs. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL) was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a glass round-bottomed flask and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the desired product.

Part D

52 lanterns (0.52 mmol, 1 eq.) were placed in a pressure flask and flushed with nitrogen. To the flask were added 2-hydroxypyridine (30 mL of a 0.35 M solution in THF; 20 eq.) and (+)-isopmocampheylamine (5.57 g, 36.4 mmol, 70 eq.) The reaction mixture was shaken for 27 h at 50 °C under an atmosphere of nitrogen. At which point a lantern was removed and washed according to the following procedure: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (57 mL), THF (57 mL), THF:DPA (3:1, 57 mL), THF: water (3:1, 57 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 57 mL), and THF (57 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container and treated with THF (300 μL) and HF-pyridine (50 μL). The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 6 h. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL) was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a glass round-bottomed flask and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the desired product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 561.5 (M+H)+.

Example 67 68

Compound 68 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 66 using indole-3-carboxaldehyde in place of pyridine-2-carbaldehyde. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 599.0 (M+H)+.

Example 68

69

Compound 69 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 66 using isoxazolidine core 18 in place of isoxazolidine core 15, and benzaldehyde in place of pyridine-2-carboxaldehyde and N'-memyl-Λ^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine in place of (+)- isopinocampheylamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 607.0 (M+H)+.

Example 69

70 Compound 70 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 66 using isoxazolidine core 18 in place of isoxazolidine core 15, and imidazole-2-carbaldehyde in place of pyridine-2-carboxaldehyde and N1 -methyl- N1 -phenyl-propane- 1,3 -diamine in place of (+)-isoρmocamρheylamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 607.5 (M+H)+.

Example 70

71

Compound 71 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 66 using isoxazolidine core 18 in place of isoxazolidine core 15, and 4-phenylbenzaldehyde in place of pyridine-2-carboxaldehyde and N^methyl-^-phenyl-propane-ljS-diamine in place of (+)-isopinocampheylamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 647.5 (M+H)+.

Example 71

72

Part A Fix as in examples above 1 lantern was added to a glass vial followed by 4- phenoxybenzene sulfonyl chloride (0.22 g, 20 eq), CH2Cl2 (0.4 mL), and pyridine (18 μL, 20 eq). The reaction mixture was shaken gently for 5 days under nitrogen. At which point the lantern was removed and washed according to the following procedure: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (1 rnL), THF (1 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 1 mL), THF: water (3:1, 1 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 1 mL), and THF (1 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container and treated with THF (300 μL) and HF-pyridine (50 μL). The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 6 h. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL) was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the desired product.

Part B

52 lanterns (0.52 mmol, 1 eq) were placed in a pressure flask and flushed with nitrogen. To the flask were added 2-hydroxypyridme (30 mL of a 0.35 M solution in THF; 20 eq.) and N1 -methyl-Λ^-phenyl-propane- 1,3 -diamine (5.97 g, 36.4 mmol, 70 eq.) The reaction mixture was shaken for 27 h at 50 0C under an atmosphere of nitrogen. At which point a lantern was removed and washed according to the following procedure: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (57 mL), THF (57 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 57 niL), THF: water (3:1, 57 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 57 mL), and THF (57 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container and treated with THF (300 μL) and HF-pyridine (50 μL ). The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 6. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL) was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a glass round-bottomed flask and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the desired product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 713.3 (M+H)+.

Example 72

73

Compound 73 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 71 using isoxazolidine core 15 in place of isoxazolidine core 18, (+)-isopinocampheylarnine in place of ^-methyl-A^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine, and biphenyl-4-sulfonyl chloride in place of 4-phenoxybenzene sulfonyl chloride. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 686.5 (M+H)+.

Example 73

74

Compound 74 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 71 using isoxazolidine core 15 in place of isoxazolidine core 18, (+)-isopinocampheylamine in place of ^-methyl-Λ^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine, and phenyl-methanesulfonyl chloride in place of 4-phenoxybenzene sulfonyl chloride. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 624.5 (M+H)+.

Example 74 Compound 75 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 71 using quinoline-8-sulfonyl chloride in place of 4-phenoxybenzene sulfonyl chloride. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 672.5 (M+H)+.

Example 75

76

Compound 76 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 71, using isoxazolidine core 15 in place of isoxazolidine core 18, (+)-isopinocampheylamine in place of V-methyl-N^phenyl-propane-l^-diamine, and phenylsulfonyl chloride in place of 4-ρhenoxybenzene sulfonyl chloride. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e 610.5 (MH-H)+.

Example 76

Part A

1 lantern was added to a glass vial followed by isocyanatomethyl-benzene (26 mg, 10 eq) and CH2Cl2 (0.8 niL). The reaction mixture was shaken gently for 24 h. At which point the lantern was removed and washed according to the following procedure: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (1 mL), THF (1 niL), THF:IPA (3:1, 1 mL), THF: water (3:1, 1 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 1 mL), and THF (1 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container and treated with THF (300 μL) and HF- pyridine (50 μL). The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 6 h. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL) was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred to a glass round-bottomed flask and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the desired product.

Part B

Fix as in examples above52 lanterns (0.52 mmol, 1 eq.) were placed in a pressure flask and flushed with nitrogen. To the flask were added 2-hydroxypyridine (0.35 M in THF; 30 mL, 20 eq.) and Λ^-methyl-^-phenyl-propane-l^-diamine (5.97 g, 36.4 mmol, 70 eq.) The reaction mixture was shaken for 27 hs at 50 ° C under an atmosphere of nitrogen. At which point a lantern was removed and washed according to the following procedure: (2 x 10 min) CH2Cl2 (57 mL), THF (57 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 57 mL), THF: water (3:1, 57 mL), THF:IPA (3:1, 57 mL), and THF (57 mL). Reaction conversion determination: 1 lantern was placed into a 5 mL polypropylene container and treated with THF (300 μL ) and HF-pyridine (50 μL). The lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for 6 hs. At which point TMSOMe (500 μL) was added and the lantern was allowed to sit in this solution for an additional 15 min The reaction solution was then transferred and concentrated under reduced pressure to afford the desired product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 614.5 (M+H)+.

Example 77

78

Compound 78 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 76, using isoxazolidine core 18 in place of isoxazolidine core 15, (+)-isopinocampheylamine in place of N^methyl-Λ^-phenyl-propane-ljS-diamine, and isocyanatomethyl-benzene. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 603.5 (M+H)+.

Example 78

79

Compound 79 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 76, using phenyl isocyanate in place of isocyanatomethyl-benzene. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 600.5 (M+H)+.

Example 79 80

Compound 80 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 76, using l-isocyanato-2-phenyl-cyclopropane in place of isocyanatomethyl-benzene. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 640.5 (M+H)+.

Example 80

81

Part A

To a solution of (+) isopinocampheylamme (0.2 g, 1.3 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 niL) at rt was added AlMβ3 (0.85 mL of a 2 M solution in toluene, 1.7 mmol) dropwise over 2.5 min The solution was stirred at rt for 10 min prior to the dropwise addition of a solution of lactone 18 (0.5 g, 0.02 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (10 mL). The reaction was stirred for 1 h, diluted with CH2Cl2 (125 mL) and a saturated aqueous solution of Rochell salt (125 mL). The mixture was vigorously stirred for 2 h until the two phases formed. The layers were separated and the organic phase was washed with water, brine, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a solid. This material was used in the following step without purification. Crude yield: 0.7g (100%).

Part B

Isoxazolidine 82 (30 mg, 0.06 mmol), 3-pyridylboronic acid (7 mg, 0.06 mmol), Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 (39 mg, 0.06 mmol), Et3N (17 mg, 0.18 mmol), and EtOH (0.5 mL) were combined at rt. This mixture was then heated toJ20 0C using a microwave for 30 min The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and resulting residue was purified by flash chromatography to give 81 (10 mg, 30%) as a pale-yellow oil. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 494.3 (M+H)+.

Example 81

83

Compound 83 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 80, using isoxazolidine core 15 in place of isoxazolidine core 18, Λ^-methyl-Λ^-phenyl- propane- 1,3 -diamine in place of (+)-isopinocampheylamine, and 3-flurorophenyl boronic acid. 25% overall yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 522.3 (M+H)+.

Example 82

84

Compound 84 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 80, using isoxazolidine core 15 in place of isoxazolidine core 18, //-methyl-i^-phenyl- propane- 1,3 -diamine in place of (+)-isopinocampheylamine, and benzothiophenyl-2- boronic acid. 17% overall yield.

Example 83

85

56 85

Isoxazolidine 56 (20 mg, 0.05 mmol) was dissolved in MeOH (10 mL) and placed

under an atomsphere of hydrogen in the presence of Pd on carbon 5 wt % (11 mg, 0.095

mmol) for 12 h ,the solution was filtered through celite and concentrated in vacuo to afford

an oil. The oil was subjected to preparative plate chromatography (CH2Cl2-MeOH, 9:1) to

afford 85 (18 mg, 62%) as a clear oil.. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 589.3 (M+H)+.

Example 84

86

Part A

To a flask was added 82 (0.33 g, 0.6 mmol ), 2-carboxyphenyl-boronic acid (0.2 g,

1.2 mmol), Cs2CO3 (0.62 g, 1.9 mmol), KOAc (60 mg, 0.6 mmol 1.0 eq.), and PdCl2(dpρf) (34.2 mg, 4.2 mol %). The flask was purged with argon and degassed DMSO (30 min with argon, 10 mL) was added and heated to 60 0C under atmosphere of argon. After 5.5 h, another portion of PdCl2(dppf) (34 mg, 4.1 mol %) was added and heating was continued for 12 h, the reaction was judged to be complete by LCMS and TLC analysis (30/70/0.5 Hexane/EtOAc/AcOH, Rf = 0.38). The reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2/water (2:1, 45 mL) and acidified to a pH 2 with 6 M HCl ( 0.5 mL). The aqueous layer was separated and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3 x 10 mL). The combined organics were washed with water (15 mL) and brine (15 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated in vacuo to afford an oil. The oil was purified chromatographed (silica gel, load 75/25, elute 50/50/0.5, 25/75/0.5 (2 x), 0/100/0.5 Hexane/EtOAc/AcOH 200 mL) to afford 87 (265 mg, 80%) as an orange-tinted amorphous solid.

Part B

To a DMF solution (0.7 mL) of 87 (15 mg, 0.03 mmol) was added the amine (13 mg, 0.12 mmol), diisopropylethylamine (15 mg, 20 μL, 0.12 mmol) and HBTU (23 mg, 0.06 mmol,). The reaction was stirred at ambient temperature. After 90 min, additional portions of amine (6 mg, 0.03 mmol,), HBTU (11 mg, 0.03 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (7 mg, 10 μL) were added. After 2 h, the reaction was diluted with MeOH (0.7 mL), and purified by HPLC to afford 85 (10 mg, 52%). MS (ESI(+)) m/e 635.4 (M+H)+.

Example 85

88

Compound 88 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 84, using ΛζN-dimethyl ethyl amine in place of ΛζiV-dimethyl butylamine 40-70% overall yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 635.4 (M+H)+. Example 86

89

Compound 89 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 84, using methylarnine in place of N,N-dimethyl butylamine 40-70% overall yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 550.2 (M+H)+.

Example 87

90

Part A

To a solution of 91 (0.5 g, 4.1 mmol) in DMF (37 mL) was added diisopropylethylamine (2.54 mL, 14.6 mmol) 92 (0.5 g, 4.1 mmol) and PyBOP (2.53 g, 4.87 mmol) .The mixture was stirred at rt for 17 h, TLC (MeOH) showed two major components. The reaction solution was diluted with water and the aquesous layer was extracted with EtOAc. The organic extracts were combined, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentratetd in vacuo to afford an oil. The crude was purified by flash column chromatography to afford 93 (0.9 g, 90%).

Part B

To a mixture of 82 (70 mg, 0.1 mmol), CuI (8 mg, 0.04 mmol), Pd(PPh3) 2C12 (22 mg, 0.03 mmol) in DMF (3 mL) was added 93 (50 mg, 0.21 mmol) followed by diisopropylethylamine (40 mg, 54.8 μL, 0.32 mmol). The resulting dark brown mixture was stirred at ambient temperature in the dark for 2 days. The reaction was diluted with EtO Ac/water (6 mL, 1:1) and the solution was neutralized to a pH 7 using 1 M HCl. The aqueous phase was separated and extracted with EtOAc (2 x 4 mL). The organic extracts were combined, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford an oil. The crude material was purified column chromatography to afford 90 (48 mg, 70%). MS (ESI(+)) m/e 663.5 (M+H)+.

Example 88

94

Part A

CuI,

110 lanterns containing the isoxazolidine core (loading 12 μmol/lantern) were placed in a reaction vessel and flushed with nitrogen. To the reaction vessel was added DMF (77 mL) Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 (1.9 g, 2.6 mmol, 2 eq), CuI (0.75 g, 4 mmol, 3 eq), 1- ethynylcyclohexylamine (3.7 g, 3.9 mL, 29 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (5 g, 6 mL, 40 mmol, 30 eq). The reaction vessel was then flushed with nitrogen, capped and shaken gently for 48 h. At which point the lanterns were removed from the reaction mixture and washed according to the following procedure: wash with CH2Cl2 (2 x 100 mL), THF (2 x 100 mL), THFZIPA (2 x 100 mL, 3:1), DMF (2 x 100 mL), THF (2 x 100 mL), CH2Cl2 (2 x 100 mL). The lanterns were dried under reduced pressure.

Part B

To 95 (5 Lanterns) in a solution of THFZDMF(1 :1, 3 mL) in a vail was added HATU (76 mg, 2 mmol), pyridine (162 μL, 2 mmol), _V,iV-dimethyl glycine (0.2 g, 20 mmol) and diisopropylethylamine (0.5 g, 0.7 mL, 4 mmol). The mixture was stirred at rt for 3 days. At which point the lanterns were removed and washed according to the following procedure: wash with CH2Cl2 (2 x 100 mL), THF (2 x 100 mL), THFZEPA (3:1, 2 x 100 mL), DMF (2 x 100 mL), THF (2 x 100 mL), CH2Cl2 (2 x 100 mL). The lanterns were dried under reduced pressure.

Part C

To a solution of (+)-isopinocampheylamine (1 g, 1.1 mL, 80 eq.,) in CH2Cl2 (4 mL) was added AlMe3 (0.4 mL of a 2.0 M solution in hexane, 0.8 mmol, 10 eq) and stirred for 15 min To the flask was added 4 Lanterns containing compound 96 and shaken gently at rt for 24h. At which point the lanterns were removed from the reaction solution and washed according to the following protocol: wash with CH2Cl2 (2 x 100 mL), THF (2 x 100 mL), THF/IPA (3:1, 2 x 100 mL), DMF (2 x 100 mL), THF (2 x 100 mL), CH2Cl2 (2 x 100 mL). The lanterns were dried under reduced pressure. The lanterns were then placed in a plastic tube and treated with THF (1.5 mL) and HF/pyridine (0.25 mL) was added and the lanterns were allowed to sit in this solution with gentle shaking for 30 min At which point, TMSOMe (0.5 mL) was added and the resulting mixture was shaken for 30 min The solution was collected and evaporated to yield the product, MS (ESI(+)) m/e 623.4 (M+H) .

Example 89

A solution of (S)-Boc-Leu-OH monohydrate (1 g, 4.1 mmol), DMF (5 mL), and N1N dimethylamine (4.1 mL of a 2.0 M solution in THF, 8.6 mmol) was treated with HBTU (2 g, 5.2 mmol) and stirred at ambient temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was added to saturated NaHCO3 (25 mL) and water (25 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with Et2O (3 x 40 mL). The combined organic extracts, along with the white insoluble material, were stripped of solvent and treated with TFA (10 mL) for 3 h, at which point the TFA was evaporated in vacuo. The residue was co-evaporated with toluene, dissolved in THF (50 mL), treated with LiAlH4 (1.6 g, 42 mmol), and the suspension held at reflux overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled in an ice bath and treated with IPA (10 mL) and 6M NaOH (5 mL); after stirring for 2 h, the suspension was filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The resisdue was suspended in brine (50 niL) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3 >< 15 mL). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford (2iS)-l-dimethylammo-2-amino-4-methyl~ pentane which was used without further purification.

A solution of this crude amine (25 mg, 0.17 mmol) and crude 98 (25 mg, 0.05 mmol) in DMF (0.7 mL) was treated with HBTU (40 mg, 0.1 mmol). After shaking for 1 h, the reaction mixture _was diluted with MeOH (0.8 mL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave a 97 (20 mg, 25%) as a white solid. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 663.5 (M+H)+.

Example 90

A solution of (R)-Boc-D-Leu-OH (1 g, 4.1 mmol), DMF (5 mL), and dimethylamine (4.3 mL of a 2M solution in THF, 8.6 mmol) was treated with HBTU (2 g, 5.2 mmol) and stirred at ambient temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was added to saturated NaHCO3 (25 mL) and water (25 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with Et2O (3 x 40 mL). The combined organic extracts along with the white insoluble material, were stripped of solvent and treated with TFA (10 mL) during 3 h, at which point the TFA was evaporated in vacuo. The residue was coevaporated with toluene, dissolved in THF (50 mL), treated with LiAlH4 (1.6 g, 42 mmol), and the suspension held at reflux overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled in an ice bath and treated successively with IPA (10 mL) and 6M NaOH (5 mL); after stirring for 2 h, the suspension was filtered, concentrated in vacuo. The residue was suspended in brine (50 mL) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3 x 15 mL). The combined organic extracts were dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentration in vacuo to afford an oil of (2i?)-l-dimethylamino-2-amino-4-methyl- pentane which was used without further purification.

A solution of this crude amine (25 mg, 0.17 mmol) and crude 98 (25 mg, 0.04 mmol) in DMF (0.7 niL) was treated with HBTU (40 mg, 0.1 mmol). After shaking for 1 h, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (0.8 mL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave a 99 (18 mg, 23%) as a white solid. MS (ESI(+))m/e 663.5 (M+H)+. .

Example 91

100

A solution of (S)-Boc- VaI-OH (1 g, 4.1 mmol), DMF (5 mL), and dimethylamine (4.3 ml of a 2 M solution in THF, 8.6 mmol) was treated with HBTU (2 g, 5.3 mmol) and stirred at ambient temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was added to saturated NaHCO3 (25 mL) and water (25 mL). The layers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with Et2O (3 x 40 mL). The combined organics, along with the white insoluble material, were stripped of solvent and treated with TFA (10 mL) during 3 h, at which point the TFA was evaporated in vacuo. The residue was coevaporated with toluene, dissolved in THF (50 mL), treated with LiAlH4 (1.6 g, 42 mmol), and the suspension held at reflux overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled in an ice bath and treated successively with EPA (10 mL) and 6M NaOH (5 mL); after stirring for 2 h, the suspension was filtered, concentrated in vacuo. The residue was suspended in brine (50 mL) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (3 x 15 mL), The combined organic extracts were dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentration in vacuo to afford a yellow oil of (2<S)-l-dimemylamino-2-amino-3-methyl- butane which was used without further purification. A solution of crude amine (22 mg, 0.17 mmol) and crude 98 (25 mg, 0.04 mmol) in DMF (0.7 mL) was treated with HBTU (40 mg, 0.1 mmol). After shaking for 1 h, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (0.8 mL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave a 100 (20 mg, 26%) as a white solid. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 649.4 (M+H)+.

Example 94

103

A solution of Boc-D-Val-OH (940 mg), DMF (5 mL), and 2.0 M dimethylamine in THF (4.3 mL) was treated with HBTU (2.0 g) and stirred at ambient temperature overnight. The reaction mixture was added to saturated NaHCO3 (25 mL) and water (25 mL), then extracted 3x40 mL Et20. The combined organics, along with the white insoluble material, were stripped of solvent and treated with TFA (10 mL) during 3h, at which point the TFA was evaporated in vacuo. The residue was coevaporated with toluene, dissolved in THF (50 mL), treated with LiAlH4 (1.6 g), and the suspension held at reflux overnight. The reaction mixture was cooled in an ice bath and treated successively with IPA (10 mL) and 6M NaOH (5 mL); after stirring for 2h, the suspension was filtered, concentrated, and brine (50 mL) added. Extraction with DCM (3x15 mL), drying of the combined organics on MgSO4, and concentration gave a foμL-smelling yellow oil of (2i?)-l-dimethylamino-2- amino-3-methyl-butane which was used without further purification. A solution of this crude amine (22 μL) and crude 98 (25 mg) in DMF (700 μL) was treated with HBTU (40 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 103 as a white solid, 20 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 649.4 (M+H)+. Example 95

104

To a vial containing crude 102 (8 mg) in DCM (2 niL) were added 37% aqueous formaldehyde (6 μL) and NaHB(OAc)3 (12 mg). The vial was shaken at ambient temperature during 1.5h; the reaction mixture was then concentrated, taken up in MeOH, and purified by HPLC, giving 104 as a white solid, 8 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 633.4 (M+H)+.

Example 96

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and l-(2-aminoethyl)piperidine (23 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (25 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave a 105 as a white solid, 20 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 647.3 (M+H)+. Example 97

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and (2i?)-l-ethyl-2-aminomethylpyrrolidme (25 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (40 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave a 106 as a white solid, 20 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 647.3 (M+H)+.

Example 98

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and ΛζN-dimethylethylenediamine (18 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (25 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave a 107 as a white solid, 23 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 607.3 (M+H)+. Example 99

A tube containing 82 (30 mg), 4-(diethylaminocarbonyl)phenylboronic acid (25 mg), Pd(Ph3P)2Cl2 (2 mg) and NEt3 (31 μL) in EtOH (900 μL) was sealed and heated in the microwave at 120 °C during 20 mins. The reaction mixture was added to silica gel (Ig) and the solvent allowed to evaporate; purification of the residue by silica gel chromatography (50->100% EtOAc/hexanes) gave 108 as a clear colorless oil, 17 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 592.4 (M+H)+.

Example 100

109

A tube containing 82 (30 mg), 4-(4-morpholinocarbonyl)phenylboronic acid (26 3mg), Pd(Ph3P)2Cl2 (2 mg) and NEt3 (31 μL) in EtOH (900 μL) was sealed and heated in the microwave at 120 0C during 20 mins. The reaction mixture was added to silica gel (Ig) and the solvent allowed to evaporate; purification of the residue by silica gel chromatography (50->100% EtOAc/hexanes) gave 109 as a clear colorless oil, 14 mg. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e 606.4 (M+H)+.

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and racemic l-dimethylamino-2-propylamine (19 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (40 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 110 as a white solid, 21 mg. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e 621.2 (M+H)+.

Example 102

111

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and l-(3-aminopropyl)piperidine (26 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (40 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 111 as a white solid, 14 mg. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e 661.4 (MH-H)+. Example 103

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and ΛζiV-diethylethylenediamme (21 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (40 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 112 as a white solid, 22 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 635.3 (M+H)+.

Example 104

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and 4-dimethylaminobutylamine (25 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (25 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 113 as a white solid, 25 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 635.3 (M+H)+.

Example 105

To a solution of (35)-3-tert-butoxycarbonylamino-pyrrolidine (204 mg) in DCM (5 mL) wasadded DIEA (286 μL) and benzyl chloroformate (188 μL). The solution was stirred overnight at ambient temperature, then added to saturated NaHCO3 and extracted with DCM (3x20 mL). The combined organic phases were dried on MgSO4 and concentrated to give a white solid. This material was dissolved in TFA (4 mL), stirred for two hours, and the solution concentrated in vacuo to give a clear oil. To a solution of this crude oil (139 mg), crude 98 (25 mg), and DIEA (80 μL) in DMF (1.4 mL) was added HBTU (80 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (1.5 mL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave a white solid. Half of this solid was dissolved in EtOH (2 mL), to which were added HOAc (5 μL) and wet 20% Pd on carbon (5 mg). H2 was bubbled through the mixture, which was then allowed to stir under an atmosphere of H2 for 4h. The reaction mixture was passed through a 0.2-micron filter and purified by HPLC to give 114 as a white solid, 6 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 605.2 (M+H)+.

Example 106

115

82 115 A tube containing 82 (30 mg), 4-(methanesμLfonyl)phenylboronic acid (22 mg), Pd(Ph3P)2Cl2 (2 mg) and NEt3 (31 μL) in EtOH (1 mL) was sealed and heated in the microwave at 120 °C during 20 mins. The reaction mixture was added to silica gel (Ig) and the solvent allowed to evaporate; purification of the residue by silica gel chromatography (50->100% EtOAc/hexanes) gave 115 as a clear colorless oil, 30 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 571.3 (M+H)+.

116

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and l-(2-aminoethyl)-4-methylpiρerazine (23 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 116 as a white solid, 26 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 662.3 (M+H)+.

Example 108

117

A flask was charged with l-(4-bromophenyl)imidazole (25 mg), Pd(dppf)Cl2 (4 mg), KOAc (33 mg), and bis(pinacolato)diboron (28 mg), flushed with a stream of Ar, and DMSO (3 mL) was added. The mixture was heated at 80 °C during Ih, then 82 (30 mg) and Cs2CO3 (35 mg) were added and heating continued at 60 0C for 4h. The reaction mixture was then purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 117 as a white solid, 6.5 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 559.2 (M+H)+.

Example 109

118 82 118 In a flask were combined 82 (100 mg), 4-(dimethylaminocarbonyl)phenylboronic acid (71 mg), Cs2CO3 (120 mg), KOAc (20 mg), and Pd(dppf)Cl2 (10 mg). The flask was flushed with Ar, and DMSO (6 mL) added; the material was then heated at 60 0C during 3h, with the more Pd(dppf)Cl2 (5 mg) added after 2.5h. The reaction mixture was cooled and added to DCM (25 mL) and 1% NaS2CNMe2 (75 mg); the laters were separated and the aqueous phase extracted 3x25 mL DCM. The combined organics were washed with water (25 mL) and brine (25 mL), then dried on Na2SO4. Concentration and HPLC putification of the material gave 118 as a white solid, 64. mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 564.3 (M+H)+.

Example 110

To a solution of crude 98 (19 mg) and (3<S)-3-(dimethylamino)pyrrolidine (18 μL) in DMF (525 μL) was added HBTU (25 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (1 mL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 119 as a white solid, 18 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 633.3 (M+H)+.

Example 111 120

82 120 In a small flask were combined 82 (25 mg), 4-(sulfonylamino)phenylboronic acid (19 mg), Cs2CO3 (40 mg), KOAc (5 mg) and Pd(dppf)Cl2 (4 mg). The flask was flushed with Ar and DMSO (3 niL) added. After heating at 60 0C during 2h, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC to give 120 as a white solid, 11 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 572.2 (M+H)+.

Example 112

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and 3-propanolamine (12 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 121 as a white solid, 23 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 594.3 (M+H)+.

Example 113 122

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and 2.0M ethylamine in THF (74 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (40 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 122 as a white solid, 15 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 564.3 (M+H)+.

Example 114

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and l-(3-aminopropyl)imidazole (19 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (25 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 123 as a white solid, 17 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 644.3 (M+H)+.

Example 115 82 124 A tube containing 82 (30 mg), 4-(methoxy(methyl)carbamoyl)phenylboronic acid (23 mg), Pd(Ph3P)2Cl2 (2 mg) and NEt3 (31 μL) in EtOH (900 μL) was sealed and heated in the microwave at 120 0C during 20 mins. The reaction mixture was added to silica gel (Ig) and the solvent allowed to evaporate; purification of the residue by silica gel chromatography (50->100% EtOAc/hexanes) gave 124 as a clear colorless oil, 22 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 580.4 (M+H)+.

Example 116

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and 1-methylhomopiperazine (20 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 125 as a white solid, 20 mg. MS CESI(H-)) m/e 633.3 (M+H)+.

Example 117 To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg), (3<S)-3 -amino- 1-methylpyrrolidine dihydrochloride (25 mg), and DIEA (50 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 126 as a white solid, 15 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 619.4 (M+H)+.

Example 118

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and histamine (18 mg) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (25 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 127 as a white solid, 10 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 630.2 (M+H)+.

Example 119 82 128 A solution of 4-bromoρhthalic anhydride (2.Og) in toluene (20 niL) was treated with 33% methylamine in EtOH (1.65 mL) and a crystal of DMAP. After stirring for Ih at ambient temperature, the mixture was heated to reflux under a dean-stark trap during 14h. The reaction mixture was cooled to -20 °C, and the resulting white crystals collected and washed with hexanes to give N-methyl-3-bromophthalimide (1.32 g) m.p. 149-151. Concentration of the mother liquor and recrystalization from benzene (3 mL) gave a second crop, 430 mg. A flask was charged with this N-methyl-3-bromophthalimide (27 mg), Pd(dppf)Cl2 (3 mg), KOAc (33 mg), and bis(pinacolato)diboron (28 mg), flushed with a stream of Ar, and DMSO (3 mL) was added. The mixture was heated at 80 0C during Ih, then 82 (30 mg) and Cs2CO3 (35 mg) were added and heating continued at 80 0C for 2.5h. The reaction mixture was then purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 128 as a white solid, 12 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 576.3 (M+H)+.

Exampl 120

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and 1-methylpiperazine (18 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 129 as a white solid, 21 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 619.3 (M+H)+. Example 121

82 130 A tube containing 82 (30 mg), 4-(dimethylaminosulfonyl)phenylboronic acid (33 mg), Pd(Ph3P)2Cl2 (2 mg) and NEt3 (31 μL) in EtOH (900 μL) was sealed and heated in the microwave at 120 0C during 20 mins. The reaction mixture was added to silica gel (Ig) and the solvent allowed to evaporate; purification of the residue by silica gel chromatography (50->75% EtOAc/hexanes) gave 130 as a clear colorless oil, 5 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 600.4 (M+H)+.

Example 122

131

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and N,N-bis(2-hydroxyethyl)ethylenediamine (20 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (40 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 131 as a white solid, 16 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 667.4 (M+H)+. Example 123

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and 4-(2-aminoethyl)morpholine (21 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 132 as a white solid, 21 mg. MS (ESI(+» m/e 649.3 (M+H)+.

Example 124

82 133 A suspension of 4-bromophthalic anhydride (1.Og) in EtOH (10 niL) was treated with 1,2,-dimethylhydrazine dihydrochloride (650 mg) and NEt3 (1.35 mL) and heated at reflux during 16 h. The reaction mixture was cooled and diluted into 0.1M HCl (100 mL). The resμLting white solid was collected by filtration, washed with water, and dried in vacuo to give 6-bromo-2,3-dimethyl-2,3-dihydrophthalazine-l,4-dione (516 mg), m.p. 207- 209. A flask was charged with this bromide (30 mg), Pd(dppf)Cl2 (4 mg), KOAc (33 mg), and bis(pinacolato)diboron (28 mg), flushed with a stream of Ar, and DMSO (3 mL) was added. The mixture was heated at 60 °C during Ih, then 82 (30 mg) and Cs2CO3 (35 mg) were added and heating continued for Ih. The reaction mixture was then purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 133 as a white solid, 16.5 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 605.2 (M+H)+.

Example 125

134

82 134 A tube containing 82 (30 mg), 4-(aminocarbonyl)phenylboronic acid (33 mg), Pd(Ph3P)2Cl2 (2 mg) and NEt3 (31 μL) in EtOH (1 mL) was sealed and heated in the microwave at 120 0C during 20 mins. The reaction mixture was added to silica gel (Ig) and the solvent allowed to evaporate; purification of the residue by silica gel chromatography gave 134 as a white solid, 8 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 536.3 (M+H)+.

Example 126

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and propylamine (12 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (40 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 135 as a white solid, 19 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 578.3 (M+H)+. Example 127

82 136 A flask containing 4-bromo-2-nitrobenzoic acid (500 mg) and a stir bar was treated with SOCl2 (3 mL) and heated under reflux during Ih. The SOCl2 was allowed to distill off; benzene (5 mL) was added and allowed to distill as well. The residue was cooled in an ice bath, dissolved in DCM (3 mL), and treated with 2.0M dimethylamine in THF (4 mL). After stirring at ambient temperature overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (80 mL), then washed with 20 mL each 2M HCl, 2M NaOH, and water. The organic layer was dried on MgSO4, filtered and the residue recrystalized from hexanes (50 mL) to give fine off yellow needles of ΛζN-dimethyl-4-bromo-2-nitrobenzamide (453 mg), m.p. 104.5-105.5 °C. A flask was charged with this bromide (30 mg), Pd(dppf)Cl2 (4 mg), KOAc (33 mg), and bis(pinacolato)diboron (28 mg), flushed with a stream of Ar, and DMSO (3 mL) was added. The mixture was heated at 80 0C during Ih, then 82 (30 mg) and Cs2CO3 (36 mg) were added and heating continued for 3.5h. The reaction mixture was then purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 136as a white solid, 10 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 609.3 (M+H)+.

Example 128 To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg), (3i?)-3 -amino- 1-methylpyrrolidine dihydrochloride (25 mg), and DIEA (50 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (40 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 137 as a white solid, 14 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 619.4 (M+H)+.

Example 129

Part A.

139 140 Compound 140 was made in 94% according to the procedure described in S.T Pickard and H.E. Smith JACS 1990, 112, 5741-5747. Part B

Compound 141 was made in 94% according to the procedure described in M. Ueda et al. Tel Lett. 2002, 43, 4369-4371. Part C

141 142 *

To a solution of the methyl gyloxate (0.29 g, 3.3 mmol, 1.5 equiv) was added the hydroxylamine (0.58g, 2.2 mmol, 1 equiv) in benzene (15 mL) the solution was heated to reflux for 72 h in a round-bottomed flask equipped with a heating mantle and a Dean-Stark trap. The solution was allowed to cool to rt and concentrated in vacuo. After concentration NMR showed full convertion to the desired nitrone the product was isolated as an orange solid Part D

To a solution of racemic methyl 2-(l-(3-iodophenyl)ethylimino)acetate N-oxide (142)( 429 mg) and (S,Z)-5-(tert-butyldimethylsilyloxy)pent-3-en-2-ol (12) (275 mg) in toluene (10 mL) was added Ti(Oz-Pr)4 (570 μL). The solution was heated in the microwave at 140 0C for 15 minutes, then treated with 3-(dimethylamino)propylene glycol (1 mL) and water (20 mL). Extraction, 3><30 mL EtOAc, followed by washing the combined organic layers with water (25 mL) and drying on MgSO4, gave a residue which was purified by column chromatography on silica (5->20% EtOAc/hexanes) to give two diastereomeric materials. The faster-eluting material weighed 179 mg. This material was dissolved in THF (5 mL) and 6M HCl (1 mL) was added. After stirring at ambient temperature for 30 minutes, EtOAc (30 mL) was added, followed by IM NaOH (5 mL), saturated NaHCO3 (13 mL), and water (13 mL). The aqueous layer was separated and extracted 2x30 mL EtOAc. The combined organic layers were washed with brine (20 mL), dried on MgSO4 and concentrated to a yellow solid. Hexanes (20 mL) were added to this residue and decanted off, leaving a white solid, 102 mg. Part E

A flame-dried flask containing (+)-isopinocampheylamine (111 mg) and DCM (2 mL) was treated with 2.0M AlMe3 in hexanes (360 μL) and stirred for 15 minutes, at which point the compound 143, suspended in DCM (4 mL), was added. After stirring 18h at ambient temperature, the reaction mixture was treatew with saturated Rochelle salt solution (10 mL), and stirred for Ih. Separation and extraction (3x10 mL DCM), followed by drying the organic phases on Na2SO4 and purification of the residue by column chromatography gave product, 205 mg. Part F

Compound 144 (30 mg), along with 4- (dimethylaminocarbonyl)phenylboronic acid (21 mg), Pd(Ph3P)2Cl2 (2 mg), and NEt3 (31 μL), was dissolved in EtOH (900 μL), which was heated in the microwave at 120 °C during 20 minutes. The reaction mixture was added to silica gel (Ig) and the solvent allowed to evaporate; purification of the residue by silica gel chromatography gave a single diastereomer of 138 as a white solid, 30 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 578.3 (M+H)+.

Example 130

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and methylaminocyclopropane (13 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (40 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 145 as a white solid, 21 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 590.3 (M+H)+.

Example 131 To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and N-(2-aminoethyl)acetamide (16 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (25 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 146 as a white solid, 18 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 621.2 (M+H)+.

Example 132

147

82 147 In a small flask were combined 82 (25 mg), 3-hydroxyphenylboronic acid (13 mg), Cs2CO3 (40 mg), KOAc (5 mg) and Pd(dpρf)Cl2 (4 mg). The flask was flushed with Ar and DMSO (3 mL) added. After heating at 60 °C during 1.5h, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC to give 147 as a white solid, 9 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 509.2 (M+H)+.

Example 133

148 To a solution of crude 98 (23 mg) and N,N,IΨ -trimethyl-l,3-propanediame (19 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (35 mg). After shaking for 4h, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (1.5 mL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 148 as a yellowish solid, 6 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 635.5 (M+H)+.

Example 134

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and methyl 3-aminopropionate (20 mg) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (35 mg) and NEt3 (18 μL). After shaking for 2h, the reaction mixture was added to sat NaHCO3 (5 mL) and water (5 mL), and extracted 3x10 mL DCM. The organic phases were dried on Na2SO4, partially concentrated, and added to silica gel (Ig) and the solvent allowed to evaporate; purification of the residue by silica gel chromatography gave 149 as a yellowish solid, 20 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 622.3 (M+H)+.

Example 135

150 A flask containing 4-bromo-2-methylbenzoic acid (495 mg) and a stir bar was treated with SOCl2 (3 niL) and heated under reflux during Ih. The SOCl2 was allowed to distill off; benzene (5 mL) was added and allqwedjo distill as well. The residue was cooled in an ice bath, dissolved in DCM (3 mL), and treated with 2.0M dimethylamine in THF (4 niL). After stirring at ambient temperature overnight, the reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (80 mL), then washed with 20 mL each 2M HCl, 2M NaOH, and water. The organic layer was dried on MgSO4 and the residue concentrated to give Λζ7V,2-trimethyl-4- bromobenzamide (460 mg) as a yellowish oil. A flask was charged with this crude bromide (27 mg), Pd(dppf)Cl2 (3 mg), KOAc (38 mg), and bis(pinacolato)diboron (34 mg), flushed with a stream of Ar, and DMSO (3 mL) was added. The mixture was heated at 80 °C during 1.5h, then 82 (30 mg) and Cs2CO3 (36 mg) were added and heating continued for 2.5h. The reaction mixture was then purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 150 as a white solid, 8 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 578.4 (M+H)+. Example 136

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and isobutylamine (16 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 151 as a white solid, 24 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 592.2 (M+H)+. Example 137

152

To a solution of crude 98 (19 mg) and (3i?)-3-(dimethylamino)pyrrolidine (18 μL) in DMF (525 μL) was added HBTU (25 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (1 mL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 152 as a white solid, 17 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 633.3 (M+H)+.

Example 138

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and 2-methoxyethylamine (13 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (40 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 153 as a white solid, 20 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 594.3 (M+H)+.

Example 139 154

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and N-(tert-butoxycarbonyl)-l,3-diaminopropane (28 mg) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 154 as a white solid, 26 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 693.3 (M+H) .

Example 140

155

82 155 In a small flask were combined 82 (50 mg), 3-methylthiophenylboronic acid (31 mg), Cs2CO3 (60 mg), KOAc (10 mg) and Pd(dρρf)Cl2 (7 mg). The flask was flushed with Ar and DMSO (5 mL) added. After heating at 60 0C during 1.5h, the reaction mixture was purified by HPLC to give a white solid, 45 mg. A portion of this solid (35 mg) was dissolved in MeOH (1 mL), and a solution of oxone (20 mg) in water (130 μL) was added. After 30 min, the reaction mixture was added to 10% Na2S2O3 (500 μL), diluted with water (10 mL), and extracted 3x10 mL DCM. The combined organic phases were concentrated and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 155 as a white solid, 28 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 555.1 (M+H)+. Example 141

156 Part A .NaHLMeI

157 158 To a solution of phenol 157 (750 mg, 3 mmol) in DMF (5 niL) at 0 °C was added NaH (130 mg, 3.6 mmol) followed by MeI (280 μL, 4.5 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 24 h and then quenched with water. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc and washed with water (2x) then brine. The solution was dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated to afford 795 mg (100%) of crude product 157. Part B

NH2OH1 NaCNBH3 ,

158 159

Aldehyde 158 (795 mg, 3.03 mmol) and hydroxylamine hydrochloride (253 mg, 3.64 mmol) were dissolved in THF/MeOH (3:2, 10 mL). Water (2 mL) was added and the pH was adjusted to 9 with 6.0 N KOH. The reaction mixture was stirred at rt overnight. After 16 h, sodium cyanoborohydride (381 mg, 6.07 mmol) was added followed by a crystal of methyl orange. The pH was adjusted to 2 and the resulting ruby red color was maintained for the duration of the reaction by the frequent addition of 1 N HCl. After stirring for 2 h another portion of sodium cyanoborohydride (381 mg) was added. After stirring for a total of 16 h, the pH of the reaction mixture was brought to 7 and DCM was added. The mixture was washed with water (3x), brine and then dried over MgSO4. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (50% EtOAc in hexanes then 100% EtOAc) to afford 706 mg (83%) of hydroxylamine 159. Part C

159 160 A solution of hydroxylamine 159 (705 mg, 2.53 mmol) and methyl glyoxylate (445 mg, 5.05 mmol) in benzene (15 mL) was heated at reflux with a Dean Stark trap overnight. Excess solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting nitrόne (160) was taken on crude in the next step. ParfD

Nitrone 160 (882 mg, 2.53 mmol), allylic alcohol 6 (820 mg, 3.79 mmol) and Ti(zOPr)4 (1.12 mL, 3.79 mmol) were dissolved in toluene (5 mL) and heated in the microwave at 120 °C for 10 min The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (15 mL) and 3-(dimethylamino)-l,2-propanediol (500 μL) was added. After stirring for 2 h, EtOAc was added and the mixture was washed with water (3x) then brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered over Celite and concentrated. The crude residue was purified by flash chromatography (5:1 hexanes/EtOAc) to afford 575 mg (43%) of lactone 161. Part E

To a solution of 161 (225 mg, 0.042 mmol) in THF (6 mL) was added pyridine (2 mL) and HF/pyridine (2 mL). The mixture was stirred at rt for 4 hrs then TMSOMe (8 mL) was added. Solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the crude product was purified by flash chromatography (EtOAc) to afford 128 mg (72%) of 162 as a white foam. Part F

To a flame-dried 10-mL round bottom flask containing (+)-isopinocampheylamme (108 μL, 0.611 mmol) and DCM (2.0 mL) was added trimethylaluminum in hexanes (2.0 M,- 305 μL, 0.611 mmol-). After -stirring for 15 min,- a solution of lactone 162 (128. mg, 0.305 mmol) in DCM (4 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at rt overnight. The reaction was quenched by the addition of saturated aqueous Rochelle salt (5 mL) and the mixture was stirred rapidly for 2h. DCM was added and the mixture washed with water (3x) then brine. The solution was dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification of the crude residue by flash chromatography (EtOAc) afforded 160 mg (91%) of 163. Part G

163 164 To a mixture of iodide 163 (45 mg, 0.079 mmol), 3-carboxyphenyl boronic acid (26 mg, 0.160 mmol), Cs2CO3 (100 mg, 0.31 mmol), KOAc (8 mg, 0.079 mmol) and Pd(dppf)Cl2 (6 mg, 0.008 mmol) under argon was added DMSO (2 mL, degassed). The reaction mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 12 h. LCMS analysis of the reaction mixture showed some remaining starting material, thus another 6 mg (0.008 mmol) of Pd(dppf)Cl2 was added, and the mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 6 h. The mixture was diluted with DCM and washed with water (3x) then brine and dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude product (164) was used in the next step without purification. Part H

To 22 mg (0.039 mmol) of acid 164 dissolved in DMF (700 μL) was added (S)-2- aminoethyl)-l-ethylpyrrolidine (20 mg, 0.16 mmol), DIEA (27 μL, 0.16 mmol) and HBTU (44 mg, 0.12 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 3 h and then diluted with methanol (800 μL). The crude product was purified by HPLC and fractions containing the desired product were combined and lyophilized to afford 5 mg (20%) of 156 as a fluffy white solid. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 677.4 (M+H)+.

Example 142

To 22 mg (0.039 mmol) of acid 164 dissolved in DMF (700 μL) was added dimethylethylenediamine (17 μL, 0.16 mmol), DIEA (27 μL, 0.16 mmol) and HBTU (44 mg, 0.12 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 3 h and then diluted with methanol (800 μL). The crude product was purified by HPLC and fractions containing the desired product were combined and lyophilized to afford 5 mg (20%) of 165 as a fluffy white solid.

Example 143

166 Part A

PMBCI, K2CO3

167 168 To crude phenol 167 (6.1 g, 30 mmol) (prepared from 2-bromophenol according to J. Med. Chan. 2001, 44 (17), 2766) was added DMF (5 niL) followed by PMBCl (4.9 mL, 36 mmol) and K2CO3 (6.3 g, 46 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at 60 °C for 5. After cooling to rt, the mixture was diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc (2x). The EtOAc layer was washed with brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. Purification of the crude material (yellow oil) by flash chromatography (9:1 hexanes/EtOAc) afforded 5.7 g (58% over two steps) of 168 as a white solid. Part B

168 TEA, EtOH, 1200C 169 microwave, 20 min To a solution of aryl bromide 168 (500 mg, 2 mmol) in EtOH (5 mL) was added Et3N (651 μL, 5 mmol), [4-(N,N-dimethylaminocarbony)phenyl]boronic acid (391 mg, 2 mmol) and Pd(PPh3)3Cl2 (109 mg, 0.2 mmol). The mixture was heated by microwave at 120 °C for 20 min and then concentrated and purified by flash chromatography to yield 320 mg (53%) of 169. Part C

H0NH2| NaCNBH3

169 170 Aldehyde 169 (640 mg, 1.64 mmol) and hydroxylamine hydrochloride (136 mg, 1.97 mmol) were dissolved in THF/MeOH (3 :2, 10 mL). Water (2 mL) was added and the pH was adjusted to 9 with 6.0 N KOH. The reaction mixture was stirred at rt overnight. After 16 h, sodium cyanoborohydride (207 mg, 3.29 mmol) was added followed by a crystal of methyl orange. The pH was adjusted to 2 and the resulting ruby red color was maintained for the duration of the reaction by the frequent addition of 1 N HCl. After stirring for 2 h another portion of sodium cyanoborohydride (207 mg) was added. After stirring for a total of 16 h, the pH of the reaction mixture was brought to 7 and DCM was added. The mixture was washed with water (3x), brine and then dried over MgSO4. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (50% EtOAc in hexanes then 100% EtOAc) to afford 500 mg (75%) of hydroxylamine 170. Part D

170 171 A solution of hydroxylamine 170 (500 mg, 1.23 mmol) and methyl glyoxylate (217 mg, 2.46 mmol) in benzene (15 mL) was heated at reflux with a Dean Stark trap overnight. Excess solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting nitrone (171) was taken on crude in the next step. Part E

171 12 172 Nitrone 171 (586 mg, 1.23 mmol), allylic alcohol 12 (399 mg, 1.84 mmol) and Ti(ZOPr)4 (544 μL, 1.84 mmol) were dissolved in toluene (5 mL) and heated in the microwave at 120 °C for 10 min The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (10 mL) and 3-(dimethylamino)-l,2-propanediol (200 μL) was added. After stirring for 2 h, EtOAc was added and the mixture was washed with water (3x) then brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered over Celite and concentrated. The crude residue was purified by flash chromatography (DCM then 10% MeOH in DCM) to afford 438 mg (54%) of lactone 172. Part F

To a solution of 172 (25 mg, 0.038 mmol) in THF (1.5 niL) at 0 0C was added pyridine (1.5 niL) and HF/pyridine (450 μL). After stirring for 2 h TMSOMe (1 mL) was added and the mixture was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material (173) was used in the next step without purification. Part G

173 166 To a small, flame-dried vial containing (+)-isopinocampheylamine (16 μL, 0.096 mmol) and DCM (500 μL) was added trimethylaluminum in hexanes (2.0 M, 38 μL, 0.077 mmol ). After stirring for 15 min, a solution of lactone 173 (21 mg, 0.038 mmol) in DCM (1 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at rt overnight. The reaction was quenched by the addition of saturated aqueous Rochelle salt (2 mL) and DCM (3 mL) and the mixture was stirred rapidly for 2h. DCM was added and the mixture washed with water (3x) then brine. The solution was dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification of the crude residue by flash chromatography (2% MeOH in DCM) afforded 18 mg (67%) of 166. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 700.3 (M+H)+.

Example 144

174 Part A —

169 175 To a solution of 169 in DCM (100 niL) was added TFA (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 3 h at rt and then diluted with DCM. The mixture was washed with saturated aqueous NaHC03 (2x) and water, and then dried over MgSCW and concentrated. The crude residue was purified by flash chromatography (2:1 to 1:1 hexanse/EtOAc) to afford 1.8 g (87%) of 175 as a yellow oil. Part B

To a solution of phenol 175 (490 mg, 1.8 mmol) in DMF (8 mL) was added NaH (90 mg, 2.2 mmol, 60%) followed by MeI (170 μL, 2.7 mmol). The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 3 h and then diluted with water and extracted with EtOAc. The EtOAc layer was washed with water then brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated. The crude residue was purified .by flash chromatography (2:1 then 1:1 hexanes/EtOAc) to afford 453 mg (88%) of 176. Part C HONH,. NaCNBH,

176 177 Aldehyde 176 (453 mg, 1.60 mmol) and hydroxylamine hydrochloride (133 mg, 1.92 mmol) were dissolved in THFMeOH (3:2, 10 mL). Water (2 mL) was added and the pEL was- adjusted to -SLmth- 6.D. ϊsLKQBL The reaction, mixture^ was stirred_at.rt overnight. After 16 h, sodium cyanoborohydride (201 mg, 3.20 mmol) was added followed by a crystal of methyl orange. The pH was adjusted to 2 and the resulting ruby red color was maintained for the duration of the reaction by the frequent addition of 1 N HCl. After stirring for 2 h another portion of sodium cyanoborohydride (201 mg) was added. After stirring for a total of 16 h, the pH of the reaction mixture was brought to 7 and DCM was added. The mixture was washed with water (3x), brine and then dried over MgSO4. The crude product was purified by flash chromatography (50% EtOAc in hexanes then 100% EtOAc) to afford 402 mg (84%) of hydroxylamine 177. Part D

177 178 A solution of hydroxylamine 177 (402 mg, 1.34 mmol) and methyl glyoxylate (236 mg, 2.68 mmol) in benzene (15 mL) was heated at reflux with a Dean Stark trap overnight. Excess solvent was removed under reduced pressure and the resulting nitrone (178) was taken on crude in the next step. Part E

Nitrone 178 (496 mg, 2.53 mmol), allylic alcohol 6 (435 mg, 2.01 mmol) and Ti(zOPr)4 (0.593 mL, 2.01 mmol) were dissolved in toluene (5 mL) and heated in the microwave at 120 0C for 10 min The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (10 mL) and 3-(dimemylamino)-l,2-propanediol (200 μL) was added. After stirring for 2 h, EtOAc was added and the mixture was washed with water (3x) then brine, dried over MgSO4, filtered over Celite and concentrated. The crude residue was purified by flash chromatography (DCM then 10% MeOH in DCM) to afford 575 mg (77%) of lactone 179. Part F

To a solution of 179 (510 mg), 919 mmol) in THF (10 mL) at 0 °C was added pyridine (5 mL) followed by HF/pyridine (2 mL). The reaction mixture was stirred for 5 h and then quenched by the addition of TMSOMe (15 mL) and concentrated. The crude residue was purified by flash chromatography (2% MeOH in DCM) to afford 267 mg (66%) of 180. Part G

To flame-dried 25-mL round bottom flask containing (+)-isopinocampheylamine (160 μL, 0.98 mmol) and DCM (2 mL) was added trimethylaluminum in hexanes (2.0 M, 490 μL, 0.98 mmol ). After stirring for 20 min, a solution of lactone 180 (215 mg, 0.490 mmol) in DCM (8 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred at rt overnight. The reaction was quenched by the addition of saturated aqueous Rochelle salt (10) and DCM (10 mL) and the mixture was stirred rapidly for 2h. DCM was added and the mixture washed with water (3x) then brine. The solution was dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated under reduced pressure. Purification of the crude residue by flash chromatography (EtOAc then 1% MeOH in EtOAc) afforded 170 mg (59%) of 174. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 594.2 (M+H)+.

Example 145

181

Aryl iodide (82)(0.04mmol), boronic acid (182)(0.08mmol), cesium carbonate (0.08mmol) and palladium catalyst(0.008mmol) are combined in a reaction vial and flushed with argon. DMSO (1 mL) is then added to reaction mixture and stirred under nitrogen at 60° C for 4 hours. The reaction solution was cooled to rt and diluted with water and extracted 3 x 5 mL of EtOAc. The organic layers were collected, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated. The crude material was purified byd HPLC. 65% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 586.1 (M+H)+.

Example 146 Aryl iodide (82)(0.04mmol), boronic acid (184)(0.08mmol), cesium carbonate (0.08mmol) and palladium catalyst(0.008mmol) are combined in a reaction vial and flushed with argon. DMSO (1 mL) is then added to reaction mixture and stirred under nitrogen at 60 degrees for 4 hours. The reaction solution was cooled to rt and diluted with water and extracted 3 x 5 mL of EtOAc. The organic layers were collected, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated. The crude material was purified byd HPLC. 60 % yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 550.2 (MH-H)+.

Example 147

185

To a solution of biaryl acid (186; made according to the procedure described in the synthesis of 87)(0.03mmol) in 0.6ml DMF was added HBTU (0.06mmol) followed by amine (187)(0.10mmol). The reaction solution was then capped and stirred at rt for 1 hour under an atmosphere of nitrogen. The reaction solution was cooled to rt and diluted with water and extracted 3 x 5 mL of EtOAc. The organic layers were collected, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated. The crude material was purified by HPLC. 85% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 697.5 (M+H)+.

Example 148 188

To a solution of biaryl acid (186)(0.03mmol) in 0.6ml DMF was added HBTU (O.Oβmmol) followed by amine (189)(0.10mmol). The reaction solution was then capped and stirred at rt for 1 hour under an atmosphere of nitrogen. The reaction solution was diluted with water and extracted 3 x 5 mL of EtOAc. The organic layers were collected, dried over MgSO4, and concentrated. The crude material was purified by HPLC. 82% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 735.6 (M+H)+.

Example 149

190

Part A

Aryl iodide 82 (2.65 mmol), vinyl boronic acid 191 (10.62 mmol), sodium carbonate (10.62 mmol) and palladium tetrakis (0.530 mmol) were weighed into a 100ml flask. Flask was then purged with argon and content were dissolved in a 4:1 ratio of toluene/water (30 mL). This mixture was then heated at 65° for three hours. The oraganic layer was then collected. The aqueous layer was extracted 3 X 20 mL of EtOAc. The organic layers were pooled, washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography. Yield 85%. Part B

192 193 Compound 192 (0.11Og, 0.205 mmol) was placed in a 200ml RB flask to which was added NMO (0.11 Ig, 0.820 mmol) dissolved in 16ml tBuOH, 8ml THF, 2ml H2O. To this stirring solution was added 2.9ml of OsO4 (0.210 g, 0.0205 mmol; 2.5% in tBuOH) solution dropwise. The reaction was checked by TLC after 4 h and SM had been completely consumed. Quenched with Na2S2O3 solution and partitioned in ethyl acetate/brine. Washed aqueous layer, dried organics with MgSO4, filtered and concentrated. This crude product (0.010 g) was then taken up in THF (0.2 mL), to which was added water (20 μL), and sodium periodate (0.0041 g) and stiired overnight.. The reaction was quenched with Na2S2O3, washed with brine, dried over MgSO4 and concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography. 85% yield. Part C

193 194 195 Aldehyde 193 (0.274mmol) was weighed and transfered to a 25ml RB flask and dissolved in methanol (6 mL). Amine 194 (0.549mmol) was then added to this solution and stirred for Ih. Reaction went from cloudy to clear. To this solution was added sodium borohydride (0.549mmol) in one portion. Another equivalent of amine was added and the reaction was stirred for 20 minutes. Then another 0.5eq borohydride was added and left to stir. The reaction was quenched with acetic acid (40μL). Benzene (2 mL) was added the reaction solution was concentrated under reduced pressure. The crude material was azeotroped one more time with 3ml benzene to a white solid and placed on high vac overnight. This material was used without purification in the next step. Part D

Compound 195 (18mgs,0.035mmol) was added to a l/8oz vial to which was added ImI DCM followed by the aldehyde 196 (0.070mmol). Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.052mmol) was then added in one portion and reaction was stirred at rt. Crude material purified by HPLC. 77 % yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 613.5 (M+H)+.

Example 150

197

Aldehyde 198 was made according to the procedure described in example 149, using aryl iodide 163 in place of aryl iodide 82. 88 % yield. Aldehyde 198 (0.02mmol) was added to a flask, dissolved in 0.4ml DCM, and the amine 199 (0.08mmol) was added. Sodium triacetoxyborohydride (0.03mmol) was then added to this mixture and stirred overnight. The crude reaction solution was purified directly on HPLC. 91 % yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 637.5 (M+H)+.

Example 151 200

To a round-bottomed flask was added 82 (20 mg, 0.035 mmol), 3-methylsulfone- phenylboronic acid (14 mg, 0.070 mmol.), cesium carbonate (34 mg, 0.11 mmol), potassium acetate (3.5 mg, 0.035 eq.), and PdCl2(dρpf) (2.9 mg, 0.0035 mmol.). The flask was purged with argon and degassed DMSO (30 min with argon, 1 mL) was added. The reaction was then heated in a 60 0C oil bath under argon for 3 h, cooled and allowed to stir at 23 0C for an additional 12 h. The mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 (5 mL), saturated brine solution (5 mL) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (2x25 mL). The combined organics were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude oil was purified by gradient flash chromatography (5 g SiO2, 90-100% EtO Ac/Hex) to yield 13 mgs (65%) of the biphenyl methylsulfone 200 as a colorless oil. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 571.2 (M+H)+.

Example 152

201 Compound 201 was prepared according to the procedure described in example 151 using 3-methylsulfide-phenylboronic acid in place of 3-methylsulfone-phenylboronic acid. Yield 70%. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 539.2 (M+H)+.

Example 153

202

To a 0 0C solution of 201 (22 mg, 0.041 mmol) in 10:1 MeOH/THF (2 niL) was added oxone in a single portion (13 mg, 0.02 eq.). After stirring at 0 0C for 1 h, the reaction mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2 (5 rnL), saturated brine solution (5 mL) and extracted with CH2Cl2 (2x10 mL). The combined organics were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude oil was purified by preparative thin layer chromatography (20x20 cm plate, 250 urn thickness, 5% MeOH/CH2Cl2) to yield 18 mg (79%) of a 1:1 diastereomeric mixture of sulfoxides as a white foam. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 555.2 (M+H)+.

Example 154

203

To a 23 0C solution of 195 (20 mg, 0.04 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL) was added 3,3- dimethylbutyraldehyde (0.08 mmol) followed by Na(OAc)3BH (10 mg, 0.06 eq.). After stirring at 23 0C for 3 h the reaction mixture was filtered through a plug of glass wool and purified directly by HPLC to provide between 5-10 mg (20-50%) of final product. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e 601.5 (MH-H)+. Example 155

205

To a 23 0C solution of 195 (20 mg, 0.04 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL) was added hydrocinnamaldehyde (0.08 mmol) followed by Na(OAc)3BH (10 mg, 0.06 eq.). After stirring at 23 0C for 3 h the reaction mixture was filtered through a plug of glass wool and purified directly by HPLC to provide between 5-10 mg (20-50%) of final product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 635.4 (M+H)+.

Example 156

To a 23 0C solution of 195 (20 mg, 0.04 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL) was added isobutyraldehyde (0.08 mmol) followed by Na(OAc)3BH (10 mg, 0.06 eq.). After stirring at 23 0C for 3 h the reaction mixture was filtered through a plug of glass wool and purified directly by HPLC to provide between 5-10 mg (20-50%) of final product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 587.5 (M+H)+.

To a 23 0C solution of 195 (20 mg, 0.04 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL) was added phenylacetaldehyde (0.08 mmol) followed by Na(OAc)3BH (10 mg, 0.06 eq.). After stirring at 23 0C for 3 h the reaction mixture was filtered through a plug of glass wool and purified directly by HPLC to provide between 5-10 mg (20-50%) of final product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 621.5 (M+H)+.

Example 158

To a 23 0C solution of 195 (20 mg, 0.04 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL) was added cyclohexanone (0.08 mmol) followed by Na(OAc)3BH (10 mg, 0.06 eq.). After stirring at 23 0C for 3 h the reaction mixture was filtered through a plug of glass wool and purified directly by HPLC to provide between 5-10 mg (20-50%) of final product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 599.5 (M+H)+.

Example 159

213

To a 23 0C solution of 195 (20 mg, 0.04 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL) was added pivaldehyde (0.08 mmol) followed by Na(OAc)3BH (10 mg, 0.06 eq.). After stirring at 23 0C for 3 h the reaction mixture was filtered through a plug of glass wool and purified directly by HPLC to provide between 5-10 mg (20-50%) of final product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 587.5 (M+H)+.

Example 160

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and l-(2-aminoethyl)pyrrolidine (16 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 215 as a white solid, 14 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 633.3 (M+H)+.

Example 161

216

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and N,N-dimethyl-l,3-propanediamine (19 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was 10 diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 216 as a white solid, 13 mg. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e 621.3 (M+H)+.

Example 162

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and isopropylamine (13 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 20 217 as a white solid, 14 mg. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e 578.3 (M+H)+. Example 163

218

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and ethanolamine (9 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 218 as a white solid, 14 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 580.3 (M+H)+.

Example 164

219

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg), NH4Cl (8 mg), and DIEA (40 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 219 as a white solid, 16 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 536.2 (M+H)+. Example 165

220

To a solution of crude 98 (25 mg) and 2.0M methylamine in THF (74 μL) in DMF (700 μL) was added HBTU (30 mg). After shaking for Ih, the reaction mixture was diluted with MeOH (800 μL) and purified by HPLC. Concentration of the appropriate fractions gave 220 as a white solid, 14 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 550.2 (M+H)+.

Example 166

221

To a DCM solution (17 niL) of 196 (0.65 mmol) at 0° C was added 222 (0.92 mmol) followed by Na(OAc)3BH (1.30 mmol) in one portion. The solution was allowed to warm to rt and stirred for 2 h; it was diluted with water (20 mL), the organic phase was separated, washed with brine (10 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a white solid. The solid was dissolved in THF (15 mL) and subjected to purification by reverse phase chromatography C18 column and 40% acetonitrile/water containing 0.01% formic acid to afford the desire product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 607.7 (M+H)+. Example 167

223

To a MeOH (0.5 niL) solution of 196 (0.03 mmol) was added 224 (0.05 mmol). This solution was stirred for 2 h at rt before NaBH4 (0.07 mmol) was added in one portion. The solution was maintained at rt for 1 h; diluted with water (3 mL) and extracted with EtOAc (2 X 2 mL). The combined organic. extracts were washed with brine (4 mL), dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford a oil. The oil was purified reverse phase chromatography Cl 8 column and 20% acetronitile/water containing 0.01% formic acid to afford the desired product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 573.8 (M+H)+.

Example 168

225

To a DMF solution (0.5 mL) of acid 186(0.028 mmol) at rt was added the N1N- dimethylethylenediamine 226 (0.11 mmol) and HBTU (0.084 mmol). The solution was stirred for 2 h, diluted with water (ImL) and extracted with EtOAc (1 mL), the organic was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford an oil. The oil was purified by reverse phase chromatography C 18 column and 10% acetonitrile/water containing 0.1% ammonium bicarbonate to afford the desired product.

Example 169

227

To a DMF solution (0.5 mL) of acid 186(0.028 mmol) at rt was added the N1N- dimethyl-l,3-propanediamine 228(0.11 mmol) and HBTU (0.084 mmol). The solution was stirred for 2 h, diluted with water (ImL) and extracted with EtOAc (1 mL), the organic extracts were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford an oil. The oil was purified by reverse phase chromatography C 18 column and 10% acetonitrile/water containing 0.1% ammonium bicarbonate to afford the desired product.

Example 170

229

To a DMF solution (0.5 mL) of acid 186(0.028 mmol) at rt was added the l-(2- aminoethyl)piperidine 230(0.11 mmol) and HBTU (0.084 mmol). The solution was stirred for 2 h, diluted with water (ImL) and extracted with EtOAc (1 mL), the extracts were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford an oil. The oil was purified by reverse phase chromatography C 18 column and 10% acetonoitrile/water containing 0.1% ammonium bicarbonate to afford the desired product.

Example 171 231

To a DMF solution (0.5 niL) of acid 186(0.028 mmol) at rt was added the (S) N- methyl-3-aminopyrrolidine 232(0.11 mmol) and HBTU (0.084 mmol). The solution was stirred for 2 h, diluted with water (ImL) and extracted with EtOAc (1 niL), the organic phase was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford an oil. The oil was purified by reverse phase chromatography C 18 column and 10% acetonitrile/water containing 0.1% ammonium bicarbonate to afford the desired product. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e 619.4 (M+H)+.

Example 172

233

To a DMF solution (0.5 mL) of acid 186(0.028 mmol) at rt was added the (R) N- methyl-3-aminopyrrolidine 234(0.11 mmol) and HBTU (0.084 mmol). The solution was stirred for 2 h, diluted with water (ImL) and extracted with EtOAc (1 mL), the organic phase was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford an oil. The oil was purified by reverse phase chromatography C 18 column and 10% acetonitrile/water containing 0.1% ammonium bicarbonate to afford the desired product.

Example 173

235

Part A

Ethyl 3-iodobenzoate (20 g, 0.077 mol), N-benzyl-Λζ N-dimethylethylenediamine (18 g, 1.4 equiv.), Pd2DBA3 (3.3 g, 5%), Cs2CO3 (33g, 1.4 equiv.) and 2- dicyclohexylphosphino-2'-(iV,iV-dimethylamino)biphenyl (2.9 g, 10%) were mixed together in a dry flask under N2. Dioxane (45 mL) and triethyl amine were added to the flask. The reaction mixture was purged under Argon for 5 min before heated to 100 C for 14 h. The mixture was cooled to rt and diluted with EtOAc (200 mL) and filtered through a plug of celite. The crude mixture was concentrated to give crude mixture 32 g. LC-MS showed the desired product. Purification (hexane, 20% followed with 60% EtOAc in hexane and ethyl acetate mixture) gave desired pd. 1Og.

Part B

Compound 238 was dissolved in 30 mL THF, and LAH (18 mL, 1 M, 0.6 equiv) was added at 0 C. The reaction mixture was then warmed to rt. After 5 h the reaction was quenched with water (5 niL), washed/extracted with ethyl acetate, dried (Na2SO4) and concentrated to give crude product 8 g. Purification on silica gel (50% ethyl acetate in hexane and ethyl acetate mixture, followed with 5% MeOH in DCM) gave desired product 6g Part C

Compound 239 was dissolved in DCM (20 mL). PDC (16 g, 2 equiv.) was added to the solution. The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 14 h. The crude mixture was filtered through a short plug of celite, and washed with ethyl acetate. The combined organic solution was concentrated and purified on silica gel (DCM, 5% MeOH in DCM) to give desired pd. 2.8 g plus 3 g of starting alcohol.

Part D

NaCNBH3 NH2OHHCl

240 241 To a solution of benzylaldehyde 240 (2.8 g) in MeOH-THF (3:1, 40 mL) was added an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine (0.9 g in 3 mL water) in one portion. The pH was adjusted to 9 with 6N KOH, and stirred at rt for 2 h, after the disappearance of the aldehyde by TLC. NaBH3CN (2 eq) was added to the solution. The pH of the solution was adjusted to ph 2-3 using HCl in MeOH (20 V/V) and the solution was allowed to stir over night. Then basified with 2N KOH to a ph of 11 and extracted with CH2CI2 (3 times), dried, concentrated in vacuo to afford 2.8 g yellow solid, which was used without purification in the next step.

Part E toluene, 120 C

241 242 Compound 241 and methyl glyoxylate ester (1 g) were dissolved in 100 mL toluene. The mixture was heated to 120 C for 3 h. The mixture was concentrated to 15 mL for next step

Part F

The toluene solution of 242 from previous the step was split between 5 vials (3 mL each). To each vial was added 0.4 g TBS allylic alcohol 12 and 0.6 g of titanium isopropoxide. The mixtures were heated to 140° C for 10 min in a microwave. The reaction mixtures were cooled to rt and combined. Ethyl acetate was added to the pooled fractions and the organic layer was washed with water, brine, dried over Mg2SO4, filtered and concentrated. Flash chromatography on silica gel ( 3% MeOH in DCM) gave partially pure product 900 mg.

Part G

The partially pure product from previous step 243 (0.9Og) was dissolved in 3 mL of dry THF; HF-Pyr (0.5 mL) was added dropwise. After 1 h, the mixture was concentrated in vacuo to give 180 mg of the desired product plus a major impurity (inseparable on column).

Part H

Isopinocampheylamine (0.18 g, 0.41 mmol) was dissolved 3 niL dry DCM, Al (Me)3 (2 M, 0.41 niL, 0.82 mmol)was added in a dropwise manner to the solution. The mixture was stirred at rt for 20 min Compound 244 was dissolved in 1 mL of DCM, and the resulting solution was added slowly to the amine and Al(Me) 3 solution. The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 12 h, and then diluted with DCM (25 mL), Rochelle salt (5 mL) (potassium sodium tartrate) aqueous solution and the two layer mixture was stirred at rt for 2 h. The organic layer was separated and washed with water and brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated to give crude product 80mg. Flash chromatography on silica gel (DCM, 2% MeOH in DCM, 5% MeOH in DCM) gave desired product 40 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 593.4 (M+H)+.

Example 174

245

Part A

j9-Nitrophenyl chloroformate (40 mg) was dissolved in 2 mL DCM and pyridine (20 ul, xx mmol, xx eq). The resulting white slurry was cooled to 0 degree symbol C and treated with 118 (80 mg, xx mmol, xx eq) in 1 mL DCM. The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 14 h, diluted with DCM (30 mL), washed with water, brine and dried over Na2SO,φ filtered and concentrated to give 77 mg crude product. Flash chromatography (Hexanes/ EtOAc 10:1 to 1:2) gave desired product 60 mg.

PartrB ■ -

Compound 246 (8 mg) and the morpholine amine (6 mg, 4 equiv.) were dissolved in 1 mL DCM, and the mixture was stirred at rt for overnight. The reaction mixture was diluted with 30 mL DCM, washed with water, brine, dried, filtered and concentrated. The crude product was purified on silica gel. (EtOAc to EtOAc-MeOH 10:1) gave pure product 7 mg. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 720.6 (M+H)+.

Example 175

247

Part A

248 249 Ethynylmagnesium bromide (0.5 M, 8 mL) was cooled to 0 degree symbol C under N2. The aldehyde 248 (0.4 g) was dissolved in 3 mL of dry THF under N2 and the solution was added in a dropwise manner to the Grignard reagent. The mixture was stirred at 0 for 10 min,-then-rt-for-4 hi -Sat.-NH4Gl-was added- to quench- the reaction and-EtO Ac was used to extract the desired product. The organic extracts were washed with brine, dried and filtered to give the desired product 0.41 g.

Part B

Isoxazolidine 18 was loaded onto lanterns according to the procedure described in Example 29, part A. In a glass vial three lanterns 250 (loading level is 18 micromole/lantern) were dried under vacuum (18 h) and then purged with nitrogen. To this vial, DMF (xx mL) dichlorobis(triphenylphosphine)palladium(II) (63 mg, 2 equiv.) and copper iodide (26 mg, 3 equiv.) were added sequentially followed by DIPEA(0.3 mL, 40 equiv.). The propargyl alcohol 249 (0.32 g, xx mmol, 40 equiv.) was dissolved in 2 mL of dry DMF and added to the vial . The vial was shaked under nitrogen for 16 h and the excess reagent was decanted. The lanterns were washed with DMF, THF. 3:1 THF/H2O, 3:1 THF/IPA, THF, CH2Cl2. The lanterns were transferred into a round-bottomed flask and the remaining solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure. The lanterns were dried under high vacuum overnight. The product was cleaved from the lantern with 20 ul HF/Pyr in 200 ul THF followed with 100 ul TMSOMe to afford the desired product.

Part C

251 247

251 (2 Lanterns) were added to a small nitrogen purged round-bottomed flask followed by THF (2 niL), 2-hydroxypyridine (40 mg, 10 equiv.) and amine (660 mg, 100 equiv.) . The reaction flask was agitated at 50 degrees C for 12 h. The excess reagent was decanted the lanterns were washed with DMF, THF. 3:1 THF/H2O, 3:1 THF/IPA, THF, CH2Cl2 and transfered to a round-bottomed flask. The remaining solvent was evaporated under reduced pressure overnight. . The product was cleaved from the lanterns with HF/Pyr (80 μL) in THF (400 μL) followed by 1 mL of TMSOMe to afford 4 mg product. LC-MS and NMR showed the desired product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 602.2 (M+H)+.

Example 176

252 Compound 252 was made according to the procedure described in example 186, using 4-(pyridin-2-yl)benzaldehyde in place of 4-methoxy-2-methylbenzaldehyde. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 635.4 (M+H)+.

Example 177

253 Part A

f- NCbz Pd(OAc)2'CS2C°3 254 255 N-Cbz piperazine (8.24 g, 37.4 mmol), 3-iodobenzyl alcohol 265 (7g, 29.9 mniol), 2-bis(tert-butyl)phosphinobiphenyl (1.8 g, 6.0 mmol), palladium acetate (1.34 g, 6.0 mmol) and cesium carbonate (14.6 g, 44.9 mmol) were combined with benzene (72 mL) at ambient temperature. This mixture was purged with argon and heated to 70 °C for 14 h. The reaction mixture was cooled to ambient and diluted with EtOAc (40 mL); the resulting mixture was stirred vigorously for 10 min Solids were removed by filtration, washed with EtOAc (2x20 mL) and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel chromotography (4:1 Hex/EtOAc) to afford 255 (2.29 g, 24%) as a light-yellow semi-solid. Part B

To a stirred solution of aldehyde 255 in MeOH (100 mL) and THF (40 mL) was added at 15 °C dropwise over 2 min an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine hydrochloride (5 mL). This solution was stirred at 15 0C for 0.5 h at which time TLC (silica gel, Hex/EtOAc, 2:1) showed no starting material. The pH was adjusted to 10 with IN NaOH (14 mL) and NaCNBH3 (1.5 g) was added in one portion. A solution of HCl in MeOH (6 M, 14 mL) was added dropwise to the reaction, which had been cooled to 0 0C, until the pH reached2-4. Cooling bath was removed after the addition of HCl was complete, and the reaction was stirred at 23 °C for 16 h. The reaction was judged to be complete after 16 h. (TLC silica gel, Hex/EtOAc, 2:1); and the pH was adjusted to 8 with sat. aqueous NaHCC^ (40 mL) . DCM/H2O (1 :1, 400 mL) was added and the layers were separated. The aqueous, layer was extracted with DCM (2x200 mL) dried (MgSO,-].), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired product as a pale-yellow oil (5.4 g, >100%). Part C

Hydroxylami ne 256 (5.1 g, 15 256 257 mmol), and methyl gyloxylate (1.3 g, 15 mmol) were combined with anhydrous toluene (100 mL). This mixture was heated to 100 °C for 6 h. The mixture was cooled to ambient and concentrated in vacuo to give the desired product (6.2 g, 100%) as a thick yellow oil.

Part D

To allylic alcohol 12 (3.2 g, 15 mmol) and nitrone 257(6.2 g, 15 mmol) in anhydrous toluene (40 mL) was added Ti(0z'Pr)4 dropwise over 3 min at ambient temperature. This solution was stirred at ambient temperature for 1 h. The solution was then transferred to 8 mircomave vessels (~6 mL/vessel); each vessel was heated individually at 140 0C in mcrowave oven for 10 min The solutions were pooled, diluted with 200 mL of EtOAc and 3-(dimethylamino)-l,2-propanediol (3.6 g, 30.0 mmol) and stirred at ambient temperature for 14 h. Purification of the crude product using silica gel chromatography Hex/EtOAc (3:1) afforded the desired product (3.4g, 38%) as a light- yellow oil. Part E HCI, THF, MeOH, rt, 1 h — — ,

258 259 To a MeOH solution (20 mL) of 258 (3.4 g, 5.7 mmol) at ambient temperature was added 1 : 1 HCl/MeOH (8 mL) in four portions over 5 min This solution was stirred for 1 h at which time TLC indicated disappearance of the starting material. With vigorous stirring aqueous sat NaHCCβ (100 mL) was added in five portions over 30 min TheTayers were separated and the aqueous layer was extracted with DCM (3 x 250 mL) The combined organic extracts were dried over NaSOφ filtered and concentrated. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (25:1 DCM/MeOH) to provide the desired product (2.45 g, 89%) as a yellow color solid. Part F

(+)-Isopinocamρheylamine (0.2 mmol) was dissolved in 0.3 mL of DCM at rt, trimethylaluminum (2.0 M in hexane, 0.2 mmol) was added and the solution was stirred for 10 min A DCM solution (0.2 m) of 259 (0.1 mmol) was added and the reaction was stirredfor 16 h. The solution was diluted with 15 mL of sat. aqueous Rochelle Salt . This mixture was stirred for 2 h until a biphasic mixture appeared. The aqueous layer was separated and extracted with DCM (2xl5mL)the combined organic extracts were washed with water (15 mL), dried over MgSO4, filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified using silica gel chromatography to give the desired product (60%) as a pale-yellow oil. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 635.4 (M+H)+.

Example 178

253 261 Compound 253 (2.1 g, 3.3 mmol) in MeOH (20 niL) was added to thick walled glass vessel designed to fit on a Parr hydrogenolysis apparatus followed by a suspension of palladium hydroxide (850 mg) in methanol (20 mL). The vessel was placed on the hydrogenolysis apparatus and subjected to a series of gas evacuation and hydrogen purge cycles using vacuum and hydrogen gas to remove any oxygen in the solvent. The vessel was then brought to 60 psi with hydrogen gas for 15 h with shaking. The catalyst was removed by filtration and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The resulting crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography, eluting with DCM/MeOH (30:1, 20:1 then 10:1) to give the desired product (1.1 g, 66%) as a light-yellow colored foam.

261 (25 mg, 0.05 mmol) and benzylisocyanate 262(7 mg, 0.05 mmol) were combined with 0.3 mL of anhydrous tolueneand heated at 90 0C for 1 h. The solution was cooled to ambient and concentrated in vacuo; the crude product was purified by silica gel chromatography eluting with 40:1 DCM/MeOH to give the desired product (10 mg, 33%) as a pale-yellow foam. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 634.3 (M+H)+. Example 179

263

Compound 263 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example in using 264 in place of 262. 36% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 650.4 (M+H)+.

Example 180

264

Compound 264was synthesized according to the procedure described in example in using 265 in place of 262.34% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 673.5 (M+H)+. Example 181

266

Compound 266was synthesized according to the procedure described in example

189 in using 267 in place of 222. 30% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 664.5 (M+H)+.

Example 182

NH Me 268

Compound 268was synthesized according to the procedure described in example

189, using 269 in place of 262. 35% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 574.3 (M+H)+. Example 183

270

Aryl iodide 82 (0.03 mmol), boronic acid 271 (0.03 mmol), PdCl2(dpρf)2, 1:1 DCM

adduct (0.006 mmol), cesium carbonate (0.03 mmol) were combined with 4:1 THF-H2O

(0.3 mL) at ambient temperature. This mixture was then degassed (freeze/pump/thaw X 3).

It was then heated to 50 0C for 12 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo at 50

0C and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography to give biaryl (75% yield).

MS (ESI(+)) m/e 550.3 (M+H)+.

Example 184

272

Part A

273 (300 mg, 1.0 mmol), alkylchloride 274 (2g, 14 mmol), cesium hydroxide (200 mg, 1.0 mmol), KI (one crystal), and 4A molecular sieves (500 mg) were combined with 1.5 mL of anhydrous DMF. This mixture was heated at 50 °C for 24 h. It was cooled to ambient and diluted with 100 mL of EtOAc. Solids were removed by filtration. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (25:1 DCM/MeOH) to give biaryl (8.5 mg, 2%) as a pale-yellow solid. Part B

82(15 mg, 0.03 mmol), 275(8 mg, 0.03 mmol), PdCl2(dppf) 2, 1:1 DCM adduct (5 mg, 0.006 mmol), cesium carbonate (9 mg, 0.03 mmol) were combined with of 4:1 THF- H2O (0.3 mL) at ambient temperature. This mixture was then degassed (vac/purged with argon 3 x) and heated at 50 °C for 12 h. The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo at 50 °C and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (15:1 DCM-MeOH) to give 272 (5 mg, 31%) as a pale-yellow foam. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 593.6 (M+H)+.

Example 185

276

Compound 277 was synthesized according to the procedure described in Part A,

-example 184; using 2rchloro-N,iV-dimethylethanamine in. place of. 2-chloro-N,N-

dimethylpropanamine

Compound 276 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example

184. 38% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 579.3 (M+H)+.

Example 186

278

Compound 279 was made according to the proecudere described in example 184,

Part A. Using 4-(2-chloroethyl)morpholine in place of 2-chloro-N,N-dimethylpropanamine.

Compound 278 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 184,

using 279 in place of 275. 23% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 621.5 (M+H)+.

Example 187

280

Compound 290 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 183, using boronic ester 281 in place of boronic acid 271 15% yield.

Example 188

282

Compound 82 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 183, using boronic ester 281 in place of boronic acid 271. 70% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 650.4 (M+H)+.

Example 189 283

Compound 82 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 183, using boronic ester 284 in place of boronic acid 271. 47% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 579.3 (M+H)+.

Example 190

285 Part A

15 (1 mmol) was added to anhydrous DMF (1 mL)followed by TBSCl (1.6 mmol) and imidazole (2.0 mmol). This solution was stirred under an argon for 8 h. Water (5 mL) was then added ) and the was aqueous layer was separated and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 10 mL). The organic extracts were pooled, dried over MgSO4, filteredand concentrated. The crude material was purified by silica gel chromatigraphy to afford 286 (98%). Part B

Compound 288 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 183, using boronic acid 287 in place of boronic acid 271. 56% yield. Part C

To a DMF (2mL) solution of 288 (0.33 g, 0.60 mmol) and HATU (0.68 g, 1.8 mmol) was added dimethylamine in (2 M in THF 1 niL) at rt. This soution was stirred for 14 h. It was partitioned between water/EtOAc (1:1, 200 mL) the separated organic layer was washed with H2O (2x50 mL) and the combined aqueous layers were back extracted with EtOAc (2x50 mL).The combined organic extracts were dried over MgSO4, filterednand concentrated in vacuo The residue was purified via silica gel chromatography (DCM, then 2:1 DCM/EtOAc) to give the desired product (Rf=0.4, 4:1 DCM/EtOAc, 67mg, 20%) as a brown-colored semi-solid. Part D

Amine (30 mg, 0.2 mmol) was dissolved in 0.3 mL of DCM; at rt trimethylaluminum hexanes solution (2.0 M, 0.1 mL) was added; this solution was stirred at rt for 10 min; a DCM solution (0.2 m) of lactone 289 (56 mg, 0.1 mmol) was added; reaction was maintained at rt fot 16 h. It was diluted with 15 mL; sat. aq pottasium sodium tartarate (Rochelle Salt) solution (15 niL) was added in one portion. This mixture was vigorously stirred at it for 2 h until a clear two-phase mixture was given. Separated aqueous, layer was extracted with DCM (2x15mL); combined organic phases were washed with water (15 mL), dried over MgSO4 and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified using SGC (1:1 Hex-EtOAc) to give the desired product (40 mg, 56%) as a pale-yellow oil.

Compound 290 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 183, using boronic ester 281 in place of boronic acid 271 15% yield.

Example 191

282

Compound 82 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 183, using boronic ester 281 in place of boronic acid 271. 70% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 650.4 (M+H)+.

Example 192 283

Compound 82 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 183, using boronic ester 284 in place of boronic acid 271. 47% yield. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 579.3 (M+H)+.

Example 193

285

Part A

Alcohol 15 (0.4 g, 1 mmol) was added to DMF (1 rnL) followed by TBSCl (0.24 g, 1.6 mmol) and imidazole (0.13 g, 2.0 mmol). This solution was stirred under an argon for 8 h. Water (5 mL) was then added and the was aqueous layer was separated and extracted with EtOAc (3 x 10 mL). The organic extracts were pooled, dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The crude material was purified by silica gel chromatigraphy (Et2O/CH2Cl2, 1:29) to afford 286 (4.9 g, 98%).

Part B

Compound 288 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example 183, using boronic acid 287 in place of boronic acid 271. 56% yield.

Part C

To a DMF (2mL) solution of 288 (0.33 g, 0.6 mmol) and HATU (0.68 g, 1.8 mmol) was added dimethylamine in (1 mL in a 2 M solution of THF, 3.1 mmol). This soution was stirred at rt for 14 h. Diluted with water/EtOAc (1:1, 200 mL) and the aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc (2 x 50 mL).The combined organic extracts were washed with water (2 x 50 mL), dried (MgSC^), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (CH2Cl2/Et0Ac, 2:1) to give 289 (67mg, 20%) as a brown- colored semi-solid.

Part D

To a solution of (+) isopinocampheylamine (30 mg, 0.2 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (0.3 mL) was added AlMe3 (0.1 mL of a 2 M solution in hexane, 0.2 mmol). After stirring for 10 min a solution of lactone 289 (56 mg, 0.1 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (0.2 mL) was added and the mixture was stirred for 16 h. with the reaction was quenched with saturated aqueous Rochelle Salt (15 mL) and vigorously stirred at rt for 2 h until a clear biphasic mixture appeared. The aqueous layer was separated and extracted with CH2Cl2 (2 x 15mL), the combined organicextracts were washed with water (15 mL), dried (MgSO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified using silica gel chromatography (Hexane/EtOAc, 1:1) to give 290 (40 mg, 56%) as a pale-yellow oil.

Part E

Solid sample of Pd/C (1.5 mg) was added under argon in one portion to a solution of 290 (15 mg, 0.02 mmol) in MeOH (0.4 mL). This mixture was treated with hydrogen gas (1 arm) at rt forl5 h. Solids were removed by filtration and the filtrate was concentrated in vacuo. The crude product was purified via silica gel chromatograhy (EtOAc) to give 285 (8 mg, 63%) as a pale-yellow oil. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 609.3 (M+H)+.

Example 194

291

Compound 261 (3 mg, 0.006 mmol), acyl chloride 292 (1.2 μL, 0.012 mmol), DMAP (one crystal), and Et3N (0.012 mmol) were combined with CH2Cl2 (0.2 mL) at rt. This solution was stirred for 20 h. and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (CH2Cl2MeOH, 30:1) to give 291 (2 mg, 58%) as a light-yellow solid. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 572.3 (M+H)+.

Example 195

293

base,

To a solution of amine 261 (3 mg, 0.006 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (0.2 mL) was added methanesulfonylchloride (2.6 mg, 0.012 mmol), DMAP (one crystal), and diisopropylethylamine (1.5 mg, 2 μL, 0.012 mmol. The solution was stirred for 20 h. and concentrated in vacuo. The resulting residue was purified by chromatography to afford 293 (1.2 mg, 37% ). MS (ESI(+)) m/e 579.2 (M+H)+.

Example 196

294

Part A

To a mixture of aryl iodide 15 (100 mg, 0.26 mmol), boronic acid (46 mg, 0.26 mmol), Et3N (77 mg, 0.11 niL, 0.77 mmol), Pd(PPh3)2Cl2 (4 mg, 2 mol %) was added EtOH (1.5 mL). The resulting mixture was heated to 80 °C for 10 min until it became an almost homogeneous. It was then heated to 120 0C in a microwave oven for 30 min The reaction mixture was concentrated in vacuo and the residue was purified by silica gel chromatography (CH2Cl2/Me0H, 60:1 to 10:1 ) to afford 295 (86 mg, 84%) as a pale- yellow oil.

Part B

To a solution of (+) Isopinocampheylamine (3 mg, 0.02 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (0.4 mL) was added AlMe3 (42 μL of a 2 M solution in hexane, 0.042 mmol). After stirring for 10 min, a solution of lactone 295 (8 mg, 0.02 mmol) in CH2Cl2 (0.4 mL) was added and the reaction was stirred for 1 h. The solution was diluted with CH2Cl2 and quenched by the addition of saturated aqueous Rochell salt (25 mL). The solution was vigorously stirred for 2 h until two phases became clear and the layers were separated. The organic phase was dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo. The residue was purified via silica gel chromatography (CH2Cl2MeOH, 40:1 to 15:1) to give 294 (3 mg, 27%) as a semi-solid. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 550.4 (M+H)+. Example 197

296

To a solution of amine 261 (7 mg, 0.01 mmol) in DMF (0.2 niL) was added diisopropylcarbodimide 297 (2 mg, 0.02 mmol). The reaction was heated to 110 0C for 12 h. The solution was cooled to ambient, diluted with water (0.5 mL), the aqueous phase was separated and extracted with EtOAc (0.5 mL). The combined organic extracts were dried (Na2SO4), filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford an oil. The oil was purified by reverse phase chromatography C 18 column containing 20% acetonitrile/water containing 0.1% ammonium bicarbonate to afford 296 (1.5 mg, 24%). MS (ESI(+)) m/e 627.4 (M+H)+.

Example 198

Compound 298 was synthesized according to the procedure decribed in example 183, using 4-(methylsulfonamido)phenylboronic acid in place of 4-acetamidophenylboronic acid. Yield 78%. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 586.3 (M+H)+.

Example 199 299 Compound 299 was synthesized according to the procedure decribed in example 148, using propylamine in place of 189. Yield 50%. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 578.4 (M+H)+. Example 200

Compound R1 Compound R1 Compound R1

Compound R1CHO Compound R1CHO

331 339

Compounds 300-339 were synthesized according to the procedure described in

Example 149. MS data is presented in the following table for compounds 300-339. MS (ESI(+)) m/e MS (ESI(H-)) m/e Compound (M-HH)+ Compound (M+H)+ 300 679.75 320 747.7 301 693.5 321 731.65 302 707.29 322 743.17 303 669.56 323 749.5 304 724.23 324 723.76 305 711.52 325 691.84 306 697.84 326 731.53 307 716.95 327 731.51 308 655.76 328 740.77 309 743.27 329 697.75 310 679.75 330 710.23 311 686.08 (M+Na) 331 748.83 312 681.72 332 709.84 313 698.89 333 724.17 314 688.54 334 724.08 315 761.93 335 772.61 316 708.53 336 709.78 317 733.46 337 693.66 318 789.61 338 735.83 319 693.78 339 749.52 Example 201

Compound Ri Compound Ri Compound

355 hexyl' A 362

C nd Ri

195 Co

Compounds 340-413 were synthesized according to the procedure described in

Example 149. MS data is presented in the following table for compounds 340-413.

MS (ESI(+)) m/e MS (ESI(+)) m/e MS (ESI(+)) m

Compound (M+H)+ Compound (M+H)+ Compound (M+H)+ 340 683.51 366 685.33 392 597.39 341 701.72 367 691.43 393 608.41 342 701.52 368 657.47 394 733.29 343 701.79 369 632.45 395 614.37 344 λ70 607.44 396 652.39 345 613.76 371 675.46 397 650.47 346 641.65 372 621.44 398 "675.43 347 613.38 373 675.36 399 621.44 348 685.34 374 699.52 400 683.46 349 635.47 375 657.47 401 623.5 350 611.47 376 625.39 402 683.46 351 637.44 377 587.48 403 615.48 352 625.46 378 623.45 404 667.47 353 587.48 379 573.7 405 665.45 354 611.46 380 621.47 406 681.75 355 615.48 381 637.44 407 724.96962 356 625.7 382 615.48 408 625.52 357 675.42 383 651.51 409 717.73 358 613.38 384 647.42 410 690.65 359 601.48 385 705.4 411 635.71 360 685.27 386 621.47 412 693.42 361 641.67 387 637.44 413 608.41 362 643.42 388 635.5 363 599.44 389 608.41 364 692.47 390 571.41 365 691.43 391 601.41

Example 202

193 Compound R1 R2 Compound R1

193 Compound Ri Compound Ri

Compound Ri R2

Compounds 414-440 were synthesized according to ' the procedure described in Example 149. MS data is presented i n the following table for compounds 414-440. MS (ESI(+)) m/e MS (ESI(+)) m/e Compound (M+H)+ Compound (M+H)+ 414 677.55 428 635.44 415 429 619.43 416 743.2 430 633.43 417 698.05 431 621.48 418 683.46 432 619.43 419 641.46 433 647.42 420 711.52 434 649.42 421 698.95 435 422 743.29 436 649.78 423 697.45 437 703.82 424 647.43 438 683.74 425 639.46 439 753.5 426 647.42 440 427 661.46 Example 203

C

193 Compound RiR2N Compound R1R2N

Compounds 441-476 were synthesized according to the procedure described in

Example 149. MS data is presented in the following table for compounds 441-476.

MS (ESI(+)) m/e MS (ESI(+)) m/e

Compound (M+H)+ Compound (M+H)+

441 683.75 459 587.48

442 627.51 460 517.3

443 599.4 461 573.42

444 613.47 462 559.46

445 621.44 463 559.48 446 545.35 464 621.44 447 529.35 465 605.37 448 633.43 466 611.49 449 573.42 467 607.39 450 633.51 468 621.65 451 613.46 469 619.42 452 593.71 470 605.43 453 599.47 471 621.46 454 607.45 472 627.48 455 587.41 473 605.43 456 605.37 474 663.43 457 633.49 475 635.74 458 649.43 476 593.38 Example 204

Compounds 477-497 were synthesized according to the procedure described in

Example 141. MS data is presented in the following table for compounds 477-497. MS (ESI(+)) m/e MS (ESI(+)) m/e Compound (M+H)+ Compound (M+H)+ 477 727.39 488 679.44 478 693.44 489 733.49 479 707.44 490 677.37 480 719.42 491 713.4 481 741.46 492 637.31 482 741.46 493 691.43 483 747.48 494 707.47 484 679.43 495 651.38 485 693.44 496 717.44 486 727.4 497 677.41 487 733.45 Example 205

Compound 554 was synthesized according to the following procedure:

A solution of aldehyde 554 (60 mg, 1 equiv) in THF (1.5 niL) was placed in a vial with stir bar and isoprene (170 μL, 15 equiv), 2.7M phosphate buffer (225 μL, 4.5 equiv), and NaClO2 solution (490 μL, 3.6 equiv) were added. The reaction was stirred at rt for 2 hours. At which point the water (30 niL) was added and the resulting solution was acidified to pH 1 with 6M HCl. The solution was then extracted with CH2Cl2 (3x15 niL). The organic layers were collected and dried on Na2SO4 and concentratedjtq give a white foam, 74 mg, which is used without further purification in the reactions above.

Compounds 498-511 were synthesized according to the procedure described in example 170. MS data is presented in the following table for compounds 498-511.

MS (ESI(+)) m/e MS (ESI(+)) m/e Compound (M+H)+ Compound (M+H)+ 498 — 505 587.41 499 627.15 506 607.68 500 642.37 (M + HCl) 507 621.41 501 627.74 508 621.39 502 573.39 509 627.46 503 — 510 — 504 621.29 511 635.07

Example 206

Compound R1R2NH Compound R1R2NH Compound R1R2NH

Compounds 512-528 were synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 149 and Part F of Example 177. MS data is presented in the following table for compounds 512-528.

MS (ESI(+)) m/e MS (ESI(+)) m/e Compound (M+H)+ Compound (M+H)+ 512 637.57 521 625.51 513 651.62 522 625.67 514 653.57 523 651.68 515 623.68 524 623.68 516 614.83 525 590.14 517 556.64 526 637.65 518 630.67 527 644.66 519 603.67 528 654.68 520 651.17

Example 207

Compound R1R2NH . Compound R1R2NH

Compound R1R2NH Compound R1R2NH

539 HyN- 54I . . . £>Λ NH,

541 «»* 544 /N ^NH, Compounds 529-544 were synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 149 and Part F of Example 177. MS data is presented in the following table for compounds 529-544. MS (ESI(H-)) m/e MS (ESI(+)) m/e Compound (M+H)+ Compound (M+H)+ 529 635.74 537 693.72 530 709.72 538 631.71 531 674.75 539 569.67 532 667.71 540 583.67 533 597.74 541 603.67 534 — 542 617.71 535 585.68 543 684.74 536 693.33 544 598.65 Example 208

553

Part A.

NaCNBH3 NHpOHHCl

To a solution of 4-heptanal (3.2 g) in MeOH-THF (3:1, 16 mL) was added an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine hydrochloride (2.6 g, 4 mL) in one portion. The pH was adjusted to 9 with 6N KOH, and stirred at rt for 2 h, after which the disappearance of the aldehyde was observed by TLC. After the addition of NaBH3CN (3.6 g, 2 eq) was complete the pH of the solution was adjusted to 2-3 using HCl in MeOH (20% V/V) and the solution was allowed to stir over night. The pH of the solution was then adjusted to 11 with 2N KOH. The layers were separated the the aqueous layer was extracted with CH2CI2 (3 x 50 mL) the combined organic extracts were dried, filtered and concentrated in vacuo to afford the desired hydroxylamine as a white liquid (3 g).

Part B.

toluene, 120 C

The hydroxyl amine (0.9 g) and methyl glyoxylate ester (0.6 g) were dissolved in toluene (10 mL). The mixture was heated to 120° C for 3 h. The mixture was concentrated to 6 ml for next step. Part C.

The nitrone ester (0.4 g, 2 mmol) and the TBS allylic alcohol (0.5 g, 2 mmol) and

titanium isopropoxide (0.9g, 3 mmol) were placed in a microwave reaction vial. The

mixture was heated to 140 0C for 15 min in the microwave. The mixture was allowed to

cool and diluted with ethyl acetate. The mixture was then washed with water, brine, dried

and concentrated. Flash chromatography on silica gel (hexanes, 10% EtOAc in Hexanes)

gave partially pure product 300mg.

Part D.

The isoxazolidine was dissolved in THF (14 mL). 6 N HCl (1 mL) was added and the

mixture was stirred at rt for 1.5 h. The mixture was diluted with EtOAc (3 x 50 ml) and the

layers were separated. The aqueous layer was extracted with EtOAc and the the combined

extracts were washed with brine, dried, filtered andconcentrated to give desired product 0.2

g- Part E.

556 557

Isopinocanipheylamine (0.6 g, 4 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (3 ml), Al(Me)3 (2 M, 4 mmol) was added drop wise to the solution. The solution was stirred at rt for 20 min The starting lactone (0.7 g, 3 mmol) was dissolved in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (3 mL), and the resulting solution was added slowly to the amine and Al(Me)3 solution. The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 12 h, and then diluted with CH2Cl2 (60 mL). A saturated solution of Rochelle's salt (5 mL) was added and the two layers were stirred at rt for 2 h. The organic layer was separated from the aqueous layer and washed with water and brine, dried (Na2SO4), filtered, and concentrated to give crude product 400mg. The crude material was purified by flash chromatography (silica gel, 50% EtOAc in Hexanes) to afford 260 mg of the desired product.

Part F.

To a solution of the 558 (0.25 g, 0.59 mmol) in 2-methyl-2-ρropanol (6 mL), THF (3 mL) and H2O (1 mL) was added NMO (0.1 g, 1.5 eq) was added of OsO4 (0.37 ml, 2.5 % solution in 2-methyl-2-propanol) dropwise. After 1.5 hr the reaction mixture was concentrated to 3 mL, diluted with CH2Cl2, brine and 10% Na2S2O3 solution, extracted with CH2CI2 (2x), dried over (MgSO^, filtered and concentrated to an off white foam. This material was used directly in the next step

The off-white foam from above was dissolved in 10:1 THF/H2O (6 mLs THF, 0.6 mL H2O). Sodium peridaote (0.19 g) was added in a single portionThe resulting mixture, stirred at rt for 12 hr. The reaction mixture was then diluted with CH2Cl2, brine and 10% Na2S2C^ solution, extracted with CH2Cl2 (2x), dried over MgSOφ filtered and concentrated to give an off white foam. The crude product was purified by column (Silica: 20 g SG60, solvent: 80% EtOAc/Hexanes) to give 0.12 g white solid product.

Part G.

To a solution of the 560 (0.1 g, 0.3 mmol) in MeOH (2 mL) was added the N1 ,N1- dimethylethane-l,2-diamine (0.030 g, 0.36 mmol). The reaction was stired at rt for 3.5 hr. NaBH4 (0.01 g, 0.3 mmol) was added in one portion and the reaction was stirred for 2 additional hours. Acetic acid (10 μL) was then added to quench the reaction and the reaction solution was concentrated to 0.5 mL. The mixture was then diluted with CH2Cl2, saturated NaHCO3 was added and the mixture was extracted with CH2Cl2 (2x), dried over MgSOφ filtered and concentrated to yield the desired product (100 mg). Part H.

561 (15 mg) was dissolved in anhyous DCM (1 niL) and cyclohexanecarbaldehyde (7 mg) was added. This solution was stirred for 15 minutes, at which point sodium triacetoxyborohydride (17 mg) was added to the reaction mixture. After 1 h, methanol (0.5 mL) was added to the reaction mixture and this solution was purified directly on HPLC, using a basic (ammonium bicarbonate-acetonenitrile) gradient. The desired fractions were combined, frozen and lyophilized to afford 7 mg desired product. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 565.75 (M+H)+. Example 209

561 Compound R1CHO Compound R .,CHO

Compounds 545-551 were synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 207. MS data is presented in the following table for compounds 545-551.

MS (ESI(+)) m/e MS (ESI(H-)) m/e Compound (MH-H)+ Compound (M+H)+ 545 587.74 549 — 546 573.71 550 — 547 559.67 551 — 548 565.76 Example 210

562

Part A.

To a solution of 3-nitrobenzylaldehyde (20 g) in MeOH-THF (3:1, 400 niL) was

added an aqueous solution of hydroxylamine (13 g in 60 niL of water) in one portion. The

pH was adjusted to 11 with KOH (6N), and stirred at rt for 2 hr NaBH3CN (17g, 2 eq) was

then added and the solution was acidified to pH 2-3 using HCl in MeOH (20 VAO- The pH

of the reaction solution was maintained at pH 3 over the course of the reaction by addition

of small amounts of the methanolic HCl solution. The mixture was allowed to stir for 12

hr. The methanolic HCl solution was added to keep the pH at 3. After another 8 h the

solution was basified with an aqueous solution of KOH (2 N) to a pH of 11 and extracted

with CH2CI2 (3 times), dried over MgSOφ concentrated in vacuo to afford 564 (20 g,

91%).

Part B.

564 565 564 (7 g) and glyoxylate ester (4g) were dissolved in 100 ml of toluene. The mixture was heated to 120 0C with stirring. After 3 hr, the solvent was evaporated to 15 ml. This solution was used directly in the in Part C.

Part C.

565 566

A solution of 565 (5 niL from Part A.) was added to a microwave tube. The allylic alcohol (1 g) and Ti(OiPr)^ (2g) were added. The microwave tube was then heated at 140 0C for 15 min The mixture was allowed to cool to rt. The crude mixture was diluted with ethyl acetate and washed with water, brine, dried over MgSC^ and concentrated. The crude material was purified by column chromatography (silica gel, 0% EtOAc in Hexanes) to afford 0.8 g of 566.

Part D.

H2, Pd on Carbon

566 566

566 (1 g) was dissolved in MeOH (10 mL). The reaction solution was purged with N2, palladium on carbon (10%, 0.7 g) was added, and a balloon full of H2 was attached to the reaction flask. The reaction was stired at rt for 45 min and then the mixture was filtered through a short plug of celite. The celite plug was washed with 2 portions of EtOAc. The organic solutions were combined and concentrated to give crude product 0.9 g. Flash chromatography (silica gel, Hexane, 30% EtOAc in Hexane) afforded 0.8 g of 566. Part E.

566 567

j^-Nitrophenyl Chloro formate (300 mg) was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (2 mL). Pyridine (0.1ml) was added to the reaction solution. The resulting white slurry was cooled to 0 C and a solution of 566 (450 mg) in CH2Cl2 (1 mL) was added in one portion. The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 14 hr. The mixture was diluted with CH2Cl2, washed with water, brine and dried over MgSOφ and concentrated to afford crude 567 (0.65 g). This material was used without further purification in Part E.

Part E.

567 (20 mg) was dissolved in CH2Cl2 (1 mL). 568 (10 mg) and DTPEA (10 μl) were added to the reaction solution. The solution was stirred at rt for 12 h. The solution was then concentrated and redissolved in 1 mL of dry THF. HF/pyr (150 μl) was added and the mixture was stirred at rt for 1.5 h. TMSOMe (1.5 ml) was added to quench the reaction and the mixture was concentrated. The crude material was purifed using HPLC to afford 569 (15 mg). Part F.

569 562

Isopinocampheylamine (5 mg) was dissolved anhydrous CH2Cl2 (1 mL). AlMe3 (2 M, 20 μl) was added drop wise to the reaction solution. This mixture was stirred at rt for 20 min A solution of 569 (7 mg, in anhydrous CH2Cl2 (1 mL)) was slowly added to the reaction solution. The reaction mixture was stirred at rt for 12 h, and then diluted CH2Cl2 (25 mL). A saturated aqueous solution of Rochelle's salt (5 mL) was added and the resulting mixture was stirred at rt for 2 hr. The organic layer was separated from the aqueous layer and washed with water, brine, dried over Na2SOφ and concentrated to give the crude product (10 mg). The crude material was purified by HPLC to afford 562 (3 mg). MS (ESI(+)) m/e 602.45 (M+H)+.

Example 211

Ph. Ph 571 N. H2N' 573 H2N- \

567 Compound R1R2NH Compound R1R2NH

Compounds 570-577 were synthesized according to the procedure described in Example 208. MS data is presented in the following table for compounds 570-577.

MS (ESI(+)) m/e MS (ESI(+)) m/e Compound (M+H)+ Compound (M+H)+ 570 636.73 574 642.49 571 636.41 575 656.5 572 650.42 576 656.5 573 650.44 577 642.7

Example 212

578 Part A.

Sodium bicarbonate (200 mg), 2-dύoro-N, iV-dimethylethanamine (200 mg) were added to a solution of 566 (200 mg) in EtOH (1 mL) under N2. The reaction mixture was stirred at 60 0C for 14 h. The reaction mixture was diluted with EtOAc (50 ml), washed with brine, dried over IM^SOφ and concentrated to afford the crude product 300 mg. Th crude product was purifed using HPLC to afford 568 (20 mg) and 567 (90 mg).

Part B.

579 (15 mg), phenyl acetaldehyde (11 mg), and NaHB(OAc)3 (20 mg) were dissolved in anhydrous THF under N2. The mixture was stirred at rt for 20 h. The reaction solution was then purified directly on the HPLC to afford 578 (4 mg). MS (ESI(+)) 607.74 m/e (M+H)+. Example 213

Compound 581 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example

210, using 3-phenylpropanal in place of phenyl acetaldehyde. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 621.44

(M+H)+.

Example 214

582

Compound 582 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example

210, using 3-chloro-N, N-dimethylpropanamine in place of 2-chloro-N, N-

dimethylethanamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 517.3 (M+H)+.

Example 215

583

Compound 583 was synthesized according to the procedure described in example

210, using 3-chloro-TV, iV-dimethylpropanamine in place of 2-chloro-Λζ, N-

dimethylethanamine. MS (ESI(+)) m/e 602.43 (M+H)+. Example 216

Compound R1CHO Compound R1CHO

MS (ESI(+)) m/e MS (ESI(+)) m/e Compound (M+H)+ Compound (M+H)+ 584 635.74 586 613.77 585 675.69

Example 217

Bcl-2 and Bcl-xL binding affinity analysis data is presented below for various compounds of the invention. Note that"****" indicates that the Ki is < 0.8 μM, "***" indicates that the Ki is 0.8-6 μM, "**" indicates that the Ki is 6-50 μM, "*" indicates that the Ki is >50 μM. Note that "f indicates that the Ki is >100 μM, and "f f " indicates that the Ki is >200 μM. Note that "ND" indicates that the value was not determined.

BcI- Bel- Compound Bcl-2 XL Compound Bcl-2 XL 28 t 72 ND 29 *** t 73 ND 30 tt 74 ND 31 t 75 ND 32 t 76 ND 33 tt 77 ND 34 t 78 ND 35 t 79 ND 36 tt 80 ND 37 t 97 tt 38 tt 99 tt 39 tt 100 t 40 t 101 t 41 t 102 t 42 tt 103 t 43 tt 104 t 44 t 105 t 45 t 106 t 46 t 107 t 47 tt 108 t 48 t 109 t 49 t 110 t 50 t 111 t 51 t 112 t 52 t 113 t 55 tt 114 t 56 tt 115 t 57 t 116 t 58 t 117 tt 59 t 118 t 60 tt 119 tt 61 t 120 tt 62 tt 121 tt 63 t 122 tt 64 t 123 t 66 ND 124 t 68 ND 125 tt 69 ND 126 t 71 ND 127 tt

Compound Bcl-2 BcI-XL Compound Bcl-2 BcI-XL 128 **** t 211 **** t 129 **** tt 213 **** t 130 **** tt 215 **** t 131 **** t 216 **** t 132 **** tt 217 **** t 133 **** t 218 **** t 134 **** t 219 **** t 135 **** tt 220 **** t 136 **** t 221 **** t 137 **** t 223 **** t 138 **** t 225 ND ND 145 **** tt 227 ND ND 146 **** t 229 ND ND 147 **** tt 231 t 148 **** t 233 ND ND 149 **** t 235 **** tt 150 **** tt 245 **** t 151 **** tt 247 **** t 152 **** tt 252 **** t 153 **** t 253 **** t 154 **** tt 260 **** t 155 **** tt 263 **** t 156 **** t 264 **** t 165 **** t 266 **** t 166 **** t 268 **** t 174 **** t 270 **** t 181 **** tt 272 **** t 183 **** tt 276 **** t 185 **** t 278 **** t 188 **** t 280 ND ND 190 **** t 282 **** tt 197 **** t 283 **** tt 200 **** t 285 **** t 201 **** t 291 **** t 202 **** t 293 **** t 203 **** t 294 **** t 205 **** t 296 **** t 207 **** t 298 **** tt 209 **** t 299 **** t Compound Bcl-2 BcI-XL Compound Bcl-2 BcI-XL 300 **** t 339 **** t 301 **** t 340 **** t 302 **** t 341 **** t 303 **** t 342 **** t 304 **** t 343 **** t 305 **** t 345 **** t 306 **** t 346 **** t 307 **** t 347 **** t 308 t 348 t 309 t 349 t 310 t 350 t 311 t 351 t 312 t 352 t 313 t 353 t 314 t 354 t 315 t 355 t 316 t 356 t 317 t 357 t 318 t 358 t 319 t 359 t 320 t 360 t 321 t 361 t 322 t 362 t 323 t 363 t 324 t 364 t 325 t 365 t 326 t 366 t 327 t 367 t 328 t 368 t 329 t 369 t 330 t 370 t 331 t 371 t 332 t 372 t 333 t 373 t 334 t 374 t 335 t 375 t 336 t 376 t 337 t 377 t 338 t 378 t

Compound Bcl-2 BcI-XL Compound Bcl-2 BcI-XL 379 **** t 418 **** t 380 **** t 419 **** t 381 **** t 420 **** t 382 **** t 421 **** t 383 **** t 422 **** t 384 **** t 423 **** t 385 **** t 424 **** t 386 **** t 425 **** t 387 **** t 426 **** t 388 **** t 427 **** t 389 **** t 428 **** t 390 **** t 429 **** t 391 **** t 430 **** t 392 **** t 431 **** t 393 **** t 432 **** t 394 **** t 433 **** t 395 **** t 434 **** t 396 **** t 435 **** t 397 **** t 436 **** t 398 **** t 437 **** t 399 **** t 438 **** t 400 **** t 439 *** t 401 **** t 440 **** t 402 **** t 441 **** t 403 **** t 442 **** t 404 t 443 t 405 t 444 t 406 t 445 t 407 t 446 t 408 t 447 t 409 t 448 t 410 t 449 t 411 t 450 t 412 t 451 t 413 t 452 t 414 t 453 t 415 t 454 t 416 t 455 t 417 t 456 t

Compound Bcl-2 BcI-XL Compound Bcl-2 BcI-XL 457 t 496 t 458 t 497 t 459 t 498 t 460 t 499 t 461 t 500 t 462 t 501 t 463 t 502 t 464 t 503 t 465 t 504 t 466 t 505 t 467 t 506 t 468 t 507 t 469 t 508 t 470 t 509 t 471 t 510 t 472 t 511 t 473 t 513 t 474 t 514 t 475 t 515 t 476 t 516 t 477 t 517 t 478 t 518 t 479 t 519 t 480 t 520 t 481 t 521 t 482 t 522 t 483 t 525 t 484 t 526 t 485 t 527 t 486 t 528 t 487 t 529 t 488 t 530 t 489 t 531 t 490 t 532 t 491 t 533 t 492 t 535 t 493 t 536 t 494 t 537 t 495 t 539 t

Compound Bcl-2 BcI-XL Compound Bc I -2 BcI-XL 540 ** t 571 **** t 542 t 572 **** t 543 t 573 **** t 545 t 574 **** t 546 t 575 **** t 547 t 576 **** t 548 t 577 **** t 549 t 578 **** t 550 t 582 **** t

552 t 584 **** t 553 t 585 **** t 562 t 586 t 570 t

Example 218

Cytotoxicity Data for RL human follicular lymphoma cell line

1) Using 96 well plates, compounds were serially diluted in DMSO from 9 mM to 4 uM 2) Assay plates were prepared by diluting samples 310 fold into 150 ul of medium containing 30,000 cells/well resulting in a final DMSO concentration of 0.3% and a concentration range from 29 uM to 0.013 uM for each compound. 3) Plates were incubated at 37 C and 5% CO2 for 72 h 4) After 72 h, Alamar blue reagent was added to each well and plates read according to manufacturer's instructions

In vitro cytotoxicity data for RL cells is presented below for various compounds of the invention. Note that "***" indicates that the IC50 is < 2 μM, "**" indicates that the IC50 is 2-5 μM, and "*" indicated that the IC50 is >5. Note that "nd" indicates that the value was not determined.

Example BcI RL Alamar Blue Example BcI RL Alamar Blue IC50 IC50 149 371 166 373 173 374 300 375 301 378 309 379 311 380 312 383 313 384 314 386 316 390 320 391 321 392 322 393 323 394 324 395 325 396 326 397 327 398 339 399 340 400 346 402 348 404 349 405 351 408 352 412 354 413 355 414 356 415 357 418 360 420 361 424 362 425 363 428 365 429 366 431 367 432 368 435 369 436

BcI RL Alamar Blue BcI RL Alamar Blue Example IC50 Example IC50 436 * 486 ** 437 * 487 ** 442 ** 488 ** 444 ** 491 ** 447 * 498 * 448 ** 502 * 456 * 505 * 465 * 507 * 466 * 562 * 470 * 570 * 471 * 571 * 472 ** 572 ** 473 * 573 ** 474 ** 574 ** 477 *** 575 ** 480 576 481 577 482 584 483 585 484 586 485

Example 219

Cell death assay with human pancreatic cancer cell line Panel

1) Compounds were serially diluted in DMSO from a 9mM stock to a final concentration of 0.004mM in a 96well plate.

2) Assay plates were prepared by diluting compounds 310 fold into 150ul of medium containing 10,000 cells/well,with or without 3uM Camptothecin, resulting in a final DMSO concentration of 0.3% and a compound concentration range from 29uM to 0.13uM for each compound.

3) Assay plates were incubated at 37C, 5% CO2 for 72 hours.

4) After 72 hours, propidium iodide and Hoechst dye were added to each well according to manufacturer's instruction.

5) Plates were imaged on a fluorescence microscope • at wavelengths Ex560/Em650 (Propidium iodide) and Ex360/Em465 (Hoechst)

6) MetaMorph imaging software was used to determine % cell death by dividing the number of propidium iodide stained cells (dead cells) by the number of Hoechst stained cells (all cells), multipled by 100, in each field.

Panel invitro cellular data is presented below for various compounds of the invention. Note that "****» indicates that the IC50 is <1.3 μM, "***" indicates that the IC50 is 1.3- 1.8 μM, "**" indicates that the IC50 is 1.8-2.5 μM, "*" indicates that the IC50 is >2.5 μM. Note that "nd" indicates that the value was not determined. Compoun Panel -Cpt Panel +Cpt Compoun Panel -Cpt Panel +Cpt (1 IC50 IC50 d IC50 IC50 89 ** *** 387 * 90 * *** 389 *** 91 * ** 390 * 96 * * 391 * 149 * ** 392 * 160 * * 393 * 166 * **** 394 * 300 * ** 395 * 301 * * 396 * 303 * * 399 * 305 *** **** 402 * 306 * *** 412 *** 307 * * 413 * 309 * *** 414 ** 310 * ** 415 * 311 * ** 416 * 312 * * 417 * 313 *** *** 418 ** 314 * * 421 * 316 * * 422 *** 317 * * 423 * 318 * * 424 ** 319 ** *** 425 * 320 * ** 426 * 321 **** **** 427 * 325 **** **** 428 * 339 * * 430 * 346 431 347 433 348 434 354 435 357 436 358 442 360 443 363 444 366 451 375 452 376 454 380 455

Compoun Panel -Cpt Panel +Cpt Compoun Panel -Cpt Panel +Cpt d IC50 IC50 d IC50 IC50 462 * 463 * 488 464 * 489 470 * 493 471 * 494 472 * 495 478 * 496 479 ** 497 480 * 498 483 * 501 484 * 505 485 ** 508 486 * 578 487 * 584 Example 217

In Vivo Analysis

The effects of the compound 221 in Example 166 were studied in a human follicular lymphoma cell line RL xenograft in female SCID/NOD mice. In this study, SCID/NOD female mice were implanted subcutaneously with RL cells (2 x 106 cells in a 1 :1 matrigel). When the average tumor size reached 150 mm3, animals were randomly assigned to treatment groups (N=8/group) to receive either vehicle, the test compound using the below mentioned dose regiment. The test article or vehicle was administered intravenously (IV) via the tail vein in a volume of 0.1 mL over approximately 10 seconds (sec). The animals were sacrificed after 38 days and tumor volumes compared.

Mice: Female SCID/NOD mice n=8/group

Dosing groups:

1. Compound 221 50 mg/kg i.v.(3 Consecutive Days MTW)

2. Compound 221 50mg/kg i.v.(Every Other Day MWF)

3. Compound 221 50mg/kg i.p. (Daily 7x/ week MTWRFSSu)

4. Vehicle i.v.(3 Consecutive Days MTW)

Vehicle: 10% cyclodextrin in 0.1MNaPhO3 pH 6.0

Dosing Schedule:

M - Monday

T - Tuesday

W - Wednesday

R - Thursday

F - Friday

S - Saturday

Su - Sunday Drug administration: Compound 221 (pH 6.8) was administered via the tail vein i.v. or intraperitoneally i.p. at (5ml/kg or 125-ul per 25g mouse) over approximately 20 sec

Animal observation: Mice were inoculated subcutaneously (SC) with the human follicular lymphoma cell line RL (2 x 106 cells 1:1 matrigel) into the dorsal side of the right rear leg using a 25 gauge needle. When tumors reached an average volume of -150 mm3, animals were randomly assigned to one of the treatment groups. Animals are divided into 4 groups (n≡~8,mice-per group). -The animals -were, carefully monitored for.3.0jmn after -dosing and. observed daily for clinical signs. Tumors and bodyweight were measured and recorded 2 X per week. Tumor dimensions were measured twice weekly with digital calipers and tumor volumes were calculated with the formula (width2 x length)/2. Mice were followed until tumor volumes in the vehicle group reached IACUC guidelines.

Study Duration: Animals were dosed for 4 weeks or until the vehicle reached 3500 mm3. At this point 50% of the surviving animals were euthanized and tumors were removed, flash frozen and stored in -80 0C. The remaining 50% were used to evaluate re-growth and durability of the anti-tumor response.

Take down

Post 4 hour dosing:

4 mice per group were sacrificed

Blood and tumors collected

Groups: Vehicle, (MWF) iv, every day i.p

Post 24 hour dosing:

4 mice per group were sacrificed.

Blood and tumors collected

Groups: Vehicle, (MWF) iv, every day i.p.

The results from the biological activity analysis of the compounds of the invention are presented in Figure 1. Incorporation by Reference

All of the U.S. patents and U.S. patent application publications cited herein are hereby incorporated by reference.

Equivalents

Those skilled in the art will recognize, or be able to ascertain using no more than routine experimentation, many equivalents to the specific embodiments of the invention described herein. Such equivalents are intended to be encompassed by the following claims.